User Manual

ArmorStart® LT Distributed Motor Controller

Catalog Numbers 290E, 291E, 294E
Important User Information
Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication, those responsible for the application and use of
this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and
use meets all performance and safety requirements, including any applicable laws, regulations, codes and standards.

The illustrations, charts, sample programs and layout examples shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of
example. Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation
does not assume responsibility or liability (to include intellectual property liability) for actual use based upon the examples
shown in this publication.

Solid-state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment. Safety
Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-1.1 available from your
local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/) describes some
important differences between solid-state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of this difference,
and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid-state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment
must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable.

In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the
use or application of this equipment.

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or
liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or
software described in this manual.

Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited.

Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.

WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment,
which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.

SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.

BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may
reach dangerous temperatures.

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
General Precautions
In addition to the precautions listed throughout this manual, the following statements, which are general to the system,
must be read and understood.

ATTENTION: This manual is intended for qualified service personnel responsible for setting up and servicing these devices. The
user must have previous experience with and a basic understanding of electrical terminology, configuration procedures,
required equipment, and safety precautions.

WARNING: The National Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA79, and any other governing regional or local code will overrule the
information in this manual. Rockwell Automation cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or proper installation of the
ArmorStart LT or associated equipment. A hazard of personal injury and/or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored
during installation.

ATTENTION: The controller contains ESD (electrostatic discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies. Static control precautions are
required when installing, testing, servicing, or repairing the assembly. Component damage may result if ESD control
procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar with static control procedures, refer to Publication 8000-4.5.2, Guarding
against Electrostatic Discharge, or any other applicable ESD protection handbooks.

ATTENTION: Only personnel familiar with the controller and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation,
startup, and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to do this may result in personal injury and/or equipment
damage.

Precautions for Bulletin 294E Applications

ATTENTION: Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or
implement the installation, startup, and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to do this may result in personal injury
and/or equipment damage.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 3

Software Requirements
The table lists the versions of software that are required.

Software Version
RSLinx Classic 2.56 or later
RSLogix 5000 17.01 or later
Download the most current version of the Add-On Profile from
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/downloads.html.
BOOTP/DHCP Version 2.3 or later

Additional Resources
These documents and websites contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products.

You can view or download publications at http:/www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/. To order paper copies of

technical documentation, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.

Table 1 - Rockwell Automation Industrial Network Resources

Resource Description
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Networks-and-Communications Rockwell Automation networks and communication website
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Networks-and-Communications/Ethernet-IP- Rockwell Automation EtherNet/IP website
Network
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/services/networks/ Rockwell Automation network and security services websites
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/services/security/
http://www.ab.com/networks/architectures.html Education series webcasts for IT and controls professionals
EtherNet/IP Embedded Switch Technology Application Guide, Publication ENET-AP005 Describes how to install, configure, and maintain linear and device-level Ring (DLR)
networks using Rockwell Automation EtherNet/IP devices with embedded switch
technology.
EtherNet/IP Network Configuration User Manual, Publication ENET-UM001 Describes how to configure and use EtherNet/IP communication modules with a
Logix5000 controller and communicate with various devices on the Ethernet network.
EtherNet Design Consideration, Publication ENET-RM002A-EN-P Provides details on ethernet design and infrastructure.
EtherNet/IP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual, Publication ENET-UM001 Provides details about how to configure your module.
EtherNet/IP Embedded Switch Technology Application Guide, Publication ENET-AP005 Provides information about using products with embedded switch technology to
construct networks with linear and ring topologies.
EtherNet/IP Industrial Protocol White Paper, Publication ENET-WP001 Describes how to implement services and data objects on a TCP/UDP/IP based Ethernet
network.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, Publication 1770-4.1 Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system.
Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, (PWM) AC Drives, Publication DRIVES-IN001 Describes wiring and grounding guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives
Product Certifications website, Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification/

4 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

Table 2 - ODVA Resources
Resource Description
http://www.odva.org/ Open DeviceNet Vendors Association (ODVA) website
http://www.odva.org/default.aspx?tabid=54 The CIP Advantage website
• CIP features and benefits
• How to get started
Ethernet Media Planning and Installation Manual, ODVA publication Describes the required media components and how to plan for, install, verify,
http://www.odva.org/Portals/0/Library/Publications_Numbered/ troubleshoot, and certify an Ethernet network.
PUB00148R0_EtherNetIP_Media_Planning_and_Installation_Manual.pdf
Network Infrastructure for EtherNet/IP: Introduction and Considerations, ODVA publication Provides an overview of the technologies used in EtherNet/IP networks and provides
http://www.odva.org/Portals/0/Library/Publications_Numbered/ guidelines for deploying infrastructure devices in EtherNet/IP networks.
PUB00035R0_Infrastructure_Guide.pdf

Table 3 - Product Selection Resources

Resource Description
Industrial Controls catalog website, Industrial Controls catalog website
http://www.ab.com/catalogs/
ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller Selection Guide, Publication 290-SG001 Product selection guide

Table 4 - Cisco and Rockwell Automation Alliance Resources

Resource Description
http://www.ab.com/networks/architectures.html Rockwell Automation and Cisco Systems reference architecture website
Converged Plantwide Ethernet (CPwE) Design and Implementation Guide, Publication Represents a collaborative development effort from Rockwell Automation and Cisco
ENET-TD001 Systems. The design guide is built on, and adds to, design guidelines from the Cisco
Ethernet-to-the-Factory (EttF) solution and the Rockwell Automation Integrated
Architecture. The design guide focuses on the manufacturing industry.

Rockwell Automation Support

Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products. At
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/, you can find technical manuals, a knowledge base of FAQs, technical
and application notes, sample code and links to software service packs, and a MySupport feature that you can customize
to make the best use of these tools.

Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation, contact Customer Support.

United States or Canada 1.440.646.3434

Outside United States or Use the Worldwide Locator at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/
Canada americas/phone_en.html, or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 5

New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the
manufacturing facility. However, if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned, follow these procedures.

United States Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the
phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process.
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return
procedure.

6 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Summary of Changes

New and Updated This table contains the changes made to this revision.
Information Topic Page
Added source brake and IPS specifications Various

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 7

Summary of Changes

Notes:

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Preface

European Communities (EC) If this product has the CE mark it is approved for installation within the
European Union and European Economic Area (EEA). It has been designed and
Directive Compliance tested to meet the following directives.

Low Voltage and EMC This product is tested to meet the European Union (EU) Council 2006/95/EC
Low Voltage Directive and the EU Council 2004/108/EC Electromagnetic
Directives Compatibility (EMC) Directive by applying the following standard(s):

• Bulletin 290E_/291E_: EN 60947-4-1 — Low-voltage switchgear and

controlgear — Part 4-1: Contactors and motor-starters — Electromechanical
contactors and motor-starters.

• Bulletin 294E_: EN 61800-3 — Adjustable speed electronic power drive

systems — Part 3: EMC product standard including specific test methods
EN 61800-5-1:2003 — Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems —
Part 5-1: Safety requirements — Electrical, thermal and energy.

This product is intended for use in an industrial environment.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 9

Preface

Introduction The ArmorStart LT is an integrated, pre-engineered, motor starting solution

designed for use in material handling applications. ArmorStart LT is the latest
addition to the ArmorStart portfolio. ArmorStart LT is a leader in the market
place given its compact size and high performance features in network, I/O, and
motor control. This manual will guide you through the features and functionality
when installing the product. Thank you for choosing ArmorStart LT for your
distributed motor control needs. If you have any questions please refer to the
“Support Section” for contact information.

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Table of Contents

Important User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Rockwell Automation Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Installation Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
New Product Satisfaction Return. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Summary of Changes
New and Updated Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Preface
European Communities (EC) Directive Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Low Voltage and EMC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Chapter 1
Product Overview Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Feature Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Standard Features Across Product Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Network Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Factory-Installed Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
ArmorStart LT Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Catalog Number Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
ArmorStart LT Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Catalog Number Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Basic Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Group Motor Installations for USA and Canada Markets. . . . . . . . 27
Control Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Motor Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Local I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Mode of Operation Bulletin 290E/291E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Full-Voltage Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Mode of Operation Bulletin 294E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Sensorless Vector Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Status LEDs and Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Fault Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Protection Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Optional HOA Selector Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Keypad Local Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Optional HOA Keypad Configuration (Bulletin 290E/291E only). . . 35

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 11

Table of Contents

Optional HOA Selector Keypad

with Jog Function (Bulletin 294E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Keypad Disable Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Source Brake Contactor and Connector (Bulletin 294E only) . . . . . . . . 38

Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Unpacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Inspecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Precautions for Bulletin 290E/291E Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Precautions for Bulletin 294E Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Connection Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Wiring Terminal Detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Branch Circuit Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Typical System Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
ArmorConnect Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
ArmorConnect Cable Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Branch Circuit Protection Requirements for ArmorConnect
Three-Phase Power Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Fusing:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Electrical Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Group Motor Installations for USA and Canada Markets. . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Cable Workmanship Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Service Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Hand Operation (HOA) Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
General Wiring Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Grounding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Grounding Safety Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Grounding PE or Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Grounding Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Delta/Wye with Grounded Wye Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
AC Line Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Line Reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Bulletin 294 Motor Cable Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Unshielded Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Shielded Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Recommended Cable Connectors/Glands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Recommended Cord Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Shield Terminating Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
General Notes (Bulletin 294E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Ethernet, DeviceNet, and I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Table of Contents

DeviceNet Connector (M18) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

ArmorConnect Power Media Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Optional Locking Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Chapter 3
Product Commissioning IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Gateway Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Configuring EtherNet/IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Manually Configure the Network Address Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Static Address Alternative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Using the Rockwell Automation BootP/DHCP Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Save the Relation List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Embedded Web Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Network Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
E-mail Notification Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
How to Add a New Module Using the Add-On Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Electronic Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Configured by. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
HOA Keypad Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Source Brake, Electro-Mechanical Brake Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
User Configurable I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
RSLogix 5000 Add-On Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Auto-Generated Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Programmable Parameters Basic Setup Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Parameter Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Bulletin 290E/291E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Basic Status Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Trip Status Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Basic Configuration Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Starter Protection Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
User I/O Configuration Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Miscellaneous Configuration Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Advanced Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Bulletin 294E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Basic Status Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Trip Status Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Motor and Control Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 13

Table of Contents

Speed Control Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Starter Protection Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
User I/O Configuration Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Miscellaneous Configuration Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Chapter 5
Diagnostics Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Status LEDs and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Fault Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Protection Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Quick Reference Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Fault LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Bulletin 290E/291E Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Bulletin 294E Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 6
Specifications Bulletin 290E/291E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Motor Overload Trip Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Bulletin 100-K/104-K Life-Load Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Bulletin 294E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Motor Overload Trip Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch ArmorStart LT Product Family. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Multiple-Motor Branch Circuits and Motor Controllers Listed for Group
Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Installation – General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Maximum Fuse Ampere Rating According to 7.2.10.4(1)
and 7.2.10.4(2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Complete Text - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Explanatory Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Input and Output Conductors of Bulletin 290E and 291E
Controllers (a) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Input and Output Conductors of Bulletin 294E Controllers (b). . . . . 191
Combined Load Conductors (c) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Appendix B
CIP Information High Level Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Product Codes and Name Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
CIP Explicit Connection Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
EDS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
CIP Object Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Identity Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
CLASS CODE 0x0001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Table of Contents

Message Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

CLASS CODE 0x0002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Assembly Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
CLASS CODE 0x0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
I/O Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Connection Manager Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
CLASS CODE 0x0006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Class 1 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Class 3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Discrete Input Point Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
CLASS CODE 0x0008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Discrete Output Point Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
CLASS CODE 0x0009 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Discrete Output Point Object Special Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Analog Input Point Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
CLASS CODE 0x000A
(Implemented in Bulletin 294E units only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Analog Output Point Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
CLASS CODE 0x000B
(Implemented in Bulletin 294E units only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Parameter Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
CLASS CODE 0x000F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Parameter Group Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
CLASS CODE 0x0010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Discrete Input Group Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
CLASS CODE 0x001D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Discrete Output Group Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
CLASS CODE 0x001E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Control Supervisor Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
CLASS CODE 0x0029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Overload Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
CLASS CODE 0x002C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Device Level Ring (DLR) Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
CLASS CODE 0x0047 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Extended Device Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
CLASS CODE 0x0064 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
DPI Fault Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
CLASS CODE 0x0097 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
DPI Alarm Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
CLASS CODE 0x0098 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
TCP/IP Interface Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
CLASS CODE 0x00F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Ethernet Link Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
CLASS CODE 0x00F6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Trip and Warning Email Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
CLASS CODE 0x0376 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 15

Table of Contents

Appendix C
Using DeviceLogix Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
DeviceLogix Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
DeviceLogix Programming Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
ArmorStart LT Bulletin 294E Example Configuration. . . . . . . . . . 236
Download the AOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Use of the AOP in RSLogix 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Chapter 1

Product Overview

Description ArmorStart LT is available with Full Voltage, Full Voltage Reversing, or Variable
Speed motor control performance. It comes equipped with a UL Listed At-motor
disconnect that supports a lock-out tag-out (LOTO) provision. ArmorStart LT
is listed as suitable for group installations per UL and can be applied with either
branch circuit breaker protection or fuse protection. It provides a robust IP66/
UL Type 4/12➊ enclosure suitable for water washdown environments in a single
box construction that will minimize inventory needs. All external connections
are made from the bottom of the unit minimizing accidental contact by moving
equipment. ArmorStart LT as a standard will come with quick disconnect
receptacles for the I/O and network connections. And finally, ArmorStart LT
will include DeviceLogix, a high-performing local logic engine when a fast I/O
response is critical to the application.

ArmorStart LT leverages the capabilities of the Rockwell Automation® Integrated

Architecture so you can achieve an unmatched level of integration and ease
of use. The architecture of ArmorStart LT allows Premiere Integration with
Allen-Bradley® ControlLogix® or CompactLogix™ line of Automation Controllers
and PLCs. RSLogix™ 5000 is the only programming tool needed which
consolidates controller programming, device configuration, and maintenance
into a single, integrated environment. ArmorStart LT includes tools such as an
Add-on Profile that will automatically generate PLC tag names for quick and
efficient configuration and programming.

The ArmorStart LT is available with options that can further reduce installation
and commissioning time and cost, such as:

• Quick disconnect receptacles for power, control, and motor connections

• Local Hand-Off-Auto keypad for manual control

• Internal power supply (IPS) eliminating the need to run additional control
power to each unit

• Bulletin 294 can be ordered with an electromechanical brake connection

(source brake)

• EDS Tag Generator tool with RS Logix 5000

➊ The G2 gland option is rated IP66/ UL Type 4

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 17

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Features The ArmorStart LT provides many features and benefits that are unsurpassed in
the market place:

• Robust IP66, UL Type 4/12 enclosure

• UL Listed, Suitable for Group Motor Applications

• UL Listed, At-motor disconnect switch

• Native support for EtherNet/IP

• Embedded dual port ethernet switch

• Device Level Ring (DLR) with Beacon frame performance

• IEEE 1588 Transparent Clock

• RSLogix 5000 Add-On Profile

• 6 user configurable I/O points

• DeviceLogix

• Embedded web server support

• Configurable e-mail response for fault or alarm events

• Optional internal power supply

• Optional electromechanical brake contactor

• Optional local control via Hand-Off-Auto keypad

• Optional quick disconnect for power and motor connections

IMPORTANT Not all options are available for Bulletin 290E/291E/294E. Refer to the catalog
configurator for details.

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Overview Chapter 1

Feature Description Standard Features Across Product Family

UL Listed “Suitable for Group Motor Applications” — Where NFPA 70

(NEC) or 79 are required installation standards, this Listing allows two or more
motors to be connected to the same branch circuit without individual motor
branch short circuit or ground fault protection. Refer to Appendix A for details.

At-motor disconnect switch — ArmorStart LT offers a local ON/OFF motor

disconnecting means with lockout-tagout provision. Industrial standards require
a local at-motor disconnect to be within eye sight of the motor for maintenance
or other shutdown reasons. Refer to your installation code for details.

User configurable I/O — ArmorStart LT offers 6 user configurable I/O points

to be used with sensors and actuators. By default all 6 points are configured as
sinking 24V DC inputs. The user has the option to select any point as a sourcing
24V DC output.

RSLogix 5000 Add-On Profile (AOP) — ArmorStart LT offers for

Allen-Bradley ControlLogix or CompactLogix PLCs a downloadable Add-On
Profile. The AOP simplifies setup and commissioning via predefined tags and
commissioning wizards. The AOP also allows copy and paste functionality for
quick setup and configuration of multiple ArmorStart LTs.

IMPORTANT AOP support for EtherNet/IP network only and requires RSLogix 5000
revision 17.01 or later. There is a known compatibility issue with revision 20.0.
Update RSLogix 5000 to 20.1 or greater.

DeviceLogix — ArmorStart LT offers local programmable logic via

DeviceLogix. DeviceLogix is a stand-alone program that resides within the
ArmorStart LT. It is programmed locally using the Add-On-Profile and
implements operations such as, AND, OR, NOT, Timers, Counters, Latches,
and Analog operations. DeviceLogix can run as a stand-alone application,
independent of the network or collaboratively with the PLC. However,
unswitched control power must be maintained for DeviceLogix to operate.

Quick disconnect for I/O and network — ArmorStart LT offers quick

disconnect connectors for I/O and communications.

EtherNet/IP node address — ArmorStart LT offers external accessible address

switches for device node address configuration. The address can be set statically
or dynamically.

EMI filter — ArmorStart LT for VFD application (Bulletin 294) provides an

internal EMI filter and is CE compliant. For CE compliant installations refer to
the recommended EMI/RFI cord grip accessory. For availability of the quick
disconnect shielded motor cable contact your local sales representative for
details.

Local and remote status and diagnostics — ArmorStart LT offers

comprehensive status and diagnostics for I/O, Network, and device health via 12

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 19

Chapter 1 Product Overview

LEDs found on the electronic control module (ECM). If a fault occurs a local
fault reset button allows the user to quickly get the process started after corrective
action is taken. The user can also configure the embedded webserver to send an e-
mail when a fault or warning occurs.

Gland plate entrance — ArmorStart LT offers different methods of connecting

three-phase, control power, and motor. ArmorStart LT has conduit entrance
openings, as standard.

Network Options Native EtherNet/IP — ArmorStart LT supports native EtherNet/IP without

additional modules or adapters. EtherNet/IP allows complete integration of
control with information across multiple Common Industrial Protocol (CIP™)
networks. EtherNet/IP allows users to integrate I/O control, device
configuration, and data collection across multiple networks enabling internet
connectivity and information.

Embedded dual port switch — ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP version includes a

dual port 10/100 mb/s ethernet switch that supports linear or Device Level Ring
(DLR) topology.

Figure 1 - Linear Topology

Device Level Ring (DLR) - ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP version offers DLR

support with beacon frame performance. DLR provides a single fault tolerant
network solution for EtherNet/IP.

Figure 2 - DLR with Beacon Performance — No Fault

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Overview Chapter 1

Figure 3 - DLR with Beacon Performance — Fault

In this example the fault is precisely identified by the link status message and the supervisor opens the blocked port to
allow network traffic to continue normally.

IEEE 1588 transparent clock —ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP version supports

the IEEE 1588 transparent clock when used with precision time protocols
(PTP). A transparent clock measures and adjusts for packet delays, therefore
removing the negative effects that these variations can cause within a
synchronized distributed network of devices.

Embedded web server — ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP version offers a web

server that can be accessed via a standard internet browser. The web server
provides status, diagnostics, and configuration capabilities.

E-mail notification — ArmorStart LT via the embedded web server, supports

configuration of the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP). Once properly
configured, the motor controller will e-mail the user with specific fault/trip
messages.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 21

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Factory-Installed Options Internal power supply (IPS) — ArmorStart LT offers the user an optional
24V DC internal power supply. The internal power supply provides all control
and I/O power needs and is sourced from the incoming 3-phase power. This
eliminates the need to run separate control power to each unit, reducing
installation time and cost. The local at-motor disconnect will remove power
from the motor terminals and outputs when in the OFF condition.

Hand/Off/Auto (HOA) keypad — ArmorStart LT offers an optional local

Hand-Off-Auto keypad. This key pad allows local start/stop motor control
regardless of PLC status. This option can be used for troubleshooting or
maintenance operations. The HOA can also be disabled when local control
is not allowed, using parameter 67.

Source brake — ArmorStart LT provides an optional, internally-controlled

electromechanical motor brake contactor. The motor brake power is sourced
from 3-phase power, L1 and L2.

Quick disconnect gland — ArmorStart LT offers a plug -n- play solution that
simplifies wiring and installation. These factory installed quick disconnect
receptacles provide connectivity to ArmorConnect® media for three-phase,
control, and motor connections. The cables are ordered separately.

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Overview Chapter 1

ArmorStart LT Characteristics
Figure 4 - Bulletin 290E/291E ArmorStart LT

0
Off

1
HOA Keypad (optional)
On

On/Off Switch IP Address Switches

LockOut/TagOut Provision Status and Diagnostic LEDs

Reset

ECM (Electronic
Control Module)

6 Configurable I/Os
Wiring Access

Dual Port EtherNet/IP

(This is replaced by a DeviceNet connector,
when DeviceNet communication is selected)

Protective Earth (PE)

Gland Plate – Conduit/Cord Grip or

ArmorConnect® Media (optional)

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 23

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Catalog Number Explanation Examples given in this section are for reference purposes. This basic explanation
should not be used for product selection; not all combinations will produce a
valid catalog number.

290 E - F A Z - G1 - Option 1 - Option 2

— — — — — — —— ——
a b c d e f g h

a e
Bulletin Number Control Voltage
Code Description Code Description
290 Full-Voltage Starter Z External 24V DC control power
291 Reversing Starter P Internal power supply

b f
Communications Gland Plate Options
Code Description (Power and Motor)

E EtherNet/IP Code Description

D DeviceNet G1 Conduit entry

G2 ArmorConnect
G3 Gland Kits ➋

c
Enclosure Type
Code Description g

F UL Type 4/12 ➊ Option 1

Code Description
3 Hand/Off/Auto selector keypad
3FR Hand/Off/Auto selector keypad with
Forward/Reverse
d
Overload Selection
Code Description
A 0.25…3.5 A
B 1.1…7.6 A
h
Option 2
Code Description
blank No option
➌

➊ IP66/UL Type 4 is available with all gland options. UL Type 4/12 is available with G1 and G3 gland option.
➋ See selection guide 290-SG001_-EN-P Accessories section for gland configurations and ordering.
➌ Leave blank unless there is a customer-specific option defined by the factory.

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Overview Chapter 1

ArmorStart LT Characteristics
Figure 5 - Bulletin 294E ArmorStart LT

0
Off

1
On

On/Off Switch
Wiring Access
LockOut/TagOut Provision

Hand-Off-Auto
Keypad (optional)

Reset

IP Address Switches Status and Diagnostic LEDs

Gland Plate – Conduit/Cord Grip or

ArmorConnect Media (optional) ECM (Electronic Control Module) 6 Configurable I/Os

Protective Earth (PE)

Dual Port EtherNet/IP
(This is replaced by a DeviceNet connector,
Bottom View when DeviceNet communication is selected)

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 25

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Catalog Number Explanation Examples given in this section are for reference purposes. This basic explanation
should not be used for product selection; not all combinations will produce a
valid catalog number.

294 E - F D1P5 Z - G1 - Option 1 - Option 2

— — — — — — —— ——
a b c d e f g h

a e
Bulletin Number Control Voltage
Code Description Code Description
294 VFD Starter Z External 24V DC control power
P Internal power supply

b
Communications f
Code Description Gland Plate Options
E EtherNet/IP (Power and Motor)

D DeviceNet Code Description

G1 Conduit entry
G2 ArmorConnect
G3 Gland kits ➋

c
Enclosure Type
Code Description
F UL Type 4/12 ➊ g
Option 1
Code Description
3 Hand/Off/Auto selector keypad with Jog
function
d
Output Current
Code Description
D1P5 1.5 A (0.4 kW), 0.5 Hp
D2P5 2.5 A (0.75 kW), 1.0Hp
h
D4P2 3.6 A (1.5 kW), 2.0Hp
Option 2
Code Description
SB Source Brake
blank No option
➌

➊ IP66/UL Type 4 is available with all gland options. UL Type 4/12 is available with G1 and G3 gland option.
➋ See selection guide 290-SG001_-EN-P Accessories section for gland configurations and ordering.
➌ Leave blank unless there is a customer-specific option defined by the factory.

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Overview Chapter 1

Basic Operation Group Motor Installations for USA and Canada Markets

The ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor controllers are listed for use with each
other in group installations per NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial
Machinery and NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code. When applied according
to the group motor installation requirements, two or more motors are permitted
on a single branch circuit. Group Motor Installation has been successfully used
for many years in the USA and Canada.

Note: For additional information regarding group motor installations with the
ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller, see Appendix A.

Control Circuit

ArmorStart LT accepts a 24V DC Class 2 input power supply for switched

and unswitched power. The control voltage provides power to the inputs
(unswitched) and outputs (switched). Unswitched control voltage is used to
ensure no loss of network connectivity, sensor, or other field input status under
normal operation. The control power terminal connections are labeled A1, A2,
and A3. Switched power is identified as (+A1) (-A2). Unswitched power is
identified as (+A3) (-A2).

As an option, ArmorStart LT can be supplied with an internal power supply

(IPS) eliminating the need for an external control power. The IPS is sourced
from the line side of 3-phase power and is not impacted by the status of the local
at-motor disconnect switch.

Figure 6 - Control Circuit Wiring Diagram — Single External Power Supply

ArmorStart LT
L1 L2 L3
Switched Control Power
Off
Unswitched Control Power
*

Disconnect

EtherNet Inputs Outputs Motor

Comms Control
Motor
Controller
A1 A2 A3
T1 T2 T3

* Control power output is determined by disconnect status

L +
24VDC
N -
Class 2
External
24VDC Power
Supply

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 27

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Figure 7 - Control Circuit Wiring Diagram — Multiple External Power Supplies

ArmorStart LT
L1 L2 L3
Switched Control Power
Off
Unswitched Control Power

*
Disconnect

EtherNet Inputs Outputs Motor

Comms Control
Motor
Controller
A1 A2 A3

T1 T2 T3

* Control power output is determined by disconnect status

Class 2 L +
External Switched
24VDC
24VDC Power Supply
N -

Class 2
L +
External Unswitched 24VDC
24VDC Power Supply N -

Figure 8 - Control Circuit Wiring Diagram — Internal Power Supply (optional)

ArmorStart LT
Internal Power
L1 L2 L3 Supply
Off

Disconnect

*
*

Motor EtherNet Motor

Controller Inputs Outputs
Comms Control

T1 T2 T3

* Control power output is determined by disconnect status

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Overview Chapter 1

Motor Circuit

The ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controllers are rated to operate the

following types of three-phase squirrel-cage induction motors:

Bulletin 290E/291E:
0.5 Hp (0.37 kW) to 5 Hp (3 kW) @ 480/277V AC
Bulletin 294E:
0.5 Hp (0.37 kW) to 2 Hp (1.5 kW) @ 480/277V AC

Local I/O
The ArmorStart LT provides as standard, 6 user configurable I/O points. By
default, all points are configured as an Input. When not using the AOP, the
user will need to refer to parameter 49 [IOPointConfiguration], to define an
output point.

When using the AOP, the I/O point is configured from the General screen
in the Module Definition section by clicking the “Change” button, see Figure 9.
This allows user to view and configure the I/O mix, refer to Figure 10.

Figure 9 - Defining I/O Point

Figure 10 - Current I/O Point Configuration

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 29

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Overload Protection

The ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller incorporates, as standard,

electronic motor overload protection. This overload protection is accomplished
electronically with an I2t algorithm. The ArmorStart LT’s overload protection is
programmable via the communication network, providing the user with greater
flexibility.

The Bulletin 290E/291E includes programmable overload Class 10, 15, and 20
protection. The Bulletin 294E provides overload protection: 150% for 60s and
200% for 3s.

Refer to Chapter 6, Specifications, for additional information.

Mode of Operation Full-Voltage Start

Bulletin 290E/291E
This method is used in applications requiring across-the-line starting, in which
full inrush current and locked-rotor torque are realized. The ArmorStart LT
Bulletin 290E offers full-voltage starting and Bulletin 291E offers full-voltage
starting for reversing applications, from 0.5 Hp (0.37 kW) to 5 Hp (3 kW) at
480Y/277V AC, 3-phase power.

Figure 11 - Full-Voltage Start

100%

Percent
Voltage

Time (seconds)

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Overview Chapter 1

Mode of Operation Sensorless Vector Performance

Bulletin 294E
Using a distributed AC drive to operate mechanical equipment at optimum
speed helps reduce energy costs and eliminates mechanical wear and tear that can
occur in the mechanical parts. The advance monitoring found in ArmorStart LT
protects critical equipment against unplanned downtime with advanced
diagnostics and notification of irregular operating parameters. ArmorStart LT
provides open-loop speed regulation (V/Hz) with slip compensation. This
provides excellent speed regulation and high levels of torque across the entire
speed range of the drive, and improved speed regulation as loading increases.

Open Loop Speed Regulation with Slip Compensation allows the VFD to
automatically adjust the output frequency to compensate for speed changes due
to motor loading. This feature utilizes an open loop, current feedback, slip
compensation circuit. Slip Compensation works as an open loop speed regulator
that increases the output frequency of the drive as the load is increased, or
decreases the frequency as the load drops. This feature is used where the motor
must run at a relatively constant speed regardless of torque output.

% of speed
100 With Slip
Compensation
99
98
97 Without Slip
Compensation
96
95
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
% of load

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 31

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Status LEDs and Reset Figure 12 - Status, Diagnostic LEDs, and Reset

ArmorStart LT provides comprehensive status and diagnostics via 12 individually

marked LEDs shown in Figure 12, located on the ECM module. In addition, a
local reset is provide for clearing of faults. Table 5 details the diagnostic and
status LEDs.

Table 5 - ArmorStart LT Status and Diagnostics Indicators

Indicator Description Color_1 Color_2
PWR LED The bicolor (green/yellow) LED shows the Solid green is illuminated when switched Solid yellow is illuminated when switched
state of the control voltage. When LED is and unswitched control power is within its or unswitched control power is outside its
off, switched and/or unswitched power is specified limits and has the proper polarity. specified limits or has incorrect polarity.
not present.
RUN/FLT LED The bicolor (green/red) LED combines the Solid green is illuminated when a Run The LED will blink red in a prescribed fault
functions of the Run and Fault LEDs. command is present. pattern when a protection fault (trip)
condition is present. See Table 6 for fault
blink patterns.
NS – Network Status The bicolor (green/red) LED indicates the Flashing green indicates an IP address is Flashing red indicates the connection has
LED status of the CIP network connection. See configured, no CIP connections are timed out. Steady Red indicates a duplicate
Network Status Indicator for further established, and an Exclusive Owner IP Address detected.
information. connection has not timed out.
Flashing bicolor (red/green) indicates a Steady green indicates at least one CIP
self-test on power up. connection is established and an Exclusive
Owner connection has not timed out.
LS1 and LS2 – Link The bicolor (green/yellow) LED shows the Solid green is illuminated when a link has Solid yellow is illuminated when a link has
Status LEDs activity/link status of each EtherNet/IP been established at 100 Mbps. been established at 10 Mbps.
port.
MS – Module Status The bicolor (green/red) LED indicates the Flashing green indicates the device has not Flashing red indicates a resettable
LED status of the module. been configured. protection fault exists or the node address
Flashing bicolor (red/green) indicates a Steady green indicates the device is switches have been changed without a
self-test on power up. configured and operational. power cycle and do not match the in-use
configuration.
Steady red indicates a non-resettable
protection fault exists.
I/O Status Six yellow LEDs are numbered 0…5 and Yellow is illuminated when input is valid or Off when input is not valid or the output is
Enunciators 0…5 indicate the status of the input/output output is on. not turned on.
LEDs connectors. One LED for each I/O point.
Reset Button The blue reset button will cause a — —
protection fault reset to occur.

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Overview Chapter 1

Electronic Data Sheet (EDS)

ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP has an embedded electronic data sheet. An EDS

consists of specially formatted text files, as defined by the CIP™. EDS files contain
details about the readable and configurable parameters of the EtherNet/IP
device. They also provide information about the I/O connections that the device
supports and the content of the associated data structures. EDS are used by
EtherNet/IP device configuration tools, such as RSNetWorx™ for EtherNet/IP,
and data servers such as RSLinx® Classic.

EDS files for all ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP devices can be uploaded directly
from the device via the web server interface. Rockwell Automation product EDS
files are also available on the internet at: http://www.ab.com/networks/eds.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 33

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Fault Diagnostics Fault diagnostics capabilities built in the ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor
Controller are designed to help you pinpoint a problem for easy troubleshooting
and quick re-starting.

Protection Faults

Protection faults will be generated when potentially dangerous or damaging

conditions are detected. Protection faults are also known as “trips” or “faults”.
These faults will be reported in multiple formats, including:

• Bit enumeration in the TripStatus parameter 16 in DeviceLogix

• In the ArmorStart LT web server for ArmorStart EtherNet/IP version

• As a sequence of LED flashes on the ECM

Table 6 - Protection Faults

LED Flash Bit Enumeration Bulletin 290E/291E Trip Status Bits Bulletin 294E Trip Status Bits
1 0 OverloadTrip ➊ OverloadTrip ➊
2 1 PhaseLossTrip PhaseLShortTrip
3 2 UnderPowerTrip ➊ UnderPowerTrip ➊
4 3 SensorShortTrip ➊ SensorShortTrip ➊
5 4 PhaseImbalTrip OverCurrentTrip
6 5 NonVolMemoryTrip ➊ NonVolMemoryTrip ➊
7 6 reserved ParamSyncTrip ➊
8 7 JamTrip DCBusOrDiscnnct ➊
9 8 StallTrip StallTrip ➊
10 9 UnderloadTrip OverTemperature ➊
11 10 reserved GroundFault ➊
12 11 reserved RestartRetries
13 12 reserved DriveHdwFault ➊
14 13 OutputShortTrip ➊ OutputShortTrip ➊
15 14 UserDefinedTrip UserDefinedTrip
16 15 HardwareFltTrip ➊ HardwareFltTrip ➊

➊ Cannot be disabled.

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Overview Chapter 1

Optional HOA Selector Keypad Local Control

Keypad
The HOA Selector Keypad allows for local start/stop/jog control in forward/
reverse motor direction. If two buttons are pressed simultaneously, this action is
ignored by the device unless one of the buttons is the OFF button. If the OFF
button is pressed at any time, the unit will go to the off state. When local Hand
mode is entered, speed reference is switched to Internal Frequency. When in
“Auto” mode the unit the speed reference is switched to the mode specified in
parameter 33 “SpeedReference”.

HAND The Hand key will initiate starter operation

The Auto key allows for Start/Stop control via the communications
AUTO network

OFF If the starter is running, pressing the OFF key will cause the starter to stop.

DIR Arrow The Dir arrow selects the direction of the motor, either forward or reverse.

When pressed, JOG will be initiated if no other control devices are sending
JOG a stop command. Releasing the key will cause the drive to stop, using
selected stop mode.

Optional HOA Keypad The ArmorStart LT offers optional factory-installed Hand/OFF/Auto (HOA)
configurations: Standard (Bulletin 290E) and Forward/Reverse (Bulletin 291E).
Configuration
(Bulletin 290E/291E only) Figure 13 - Bulletin 290E Standard HOA

Figure 14 - Bulletin 291 Forward/Reverse HOA

E

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 35

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Bulletin 290E

With the KeypadMode parameter (parameter 66) set to 1 = Maintained, pressing

the buttons reacts like a maintained switch.
Current Mode
Key Press OFF HAND AUTO
AUTO Auto Mode — Motor Off — —
HAND If no fault, Motor On — —
OFF — Motor turns Off Motor turns Off
FAULT PRESENT — Motor turns Off Motor turns Off

With the KeypadMode parameter (parameter 66) set to 0 = Momentary,

pressing the buttons reacts like a momentary switch.
Current Mode
Key Press OFF Key HAND AUTO Key
NO KEY PRESSED — Motor Off —
AUTO Auto Mode — Motor Off — —
HAND If no fault, Motor On — —
OFF — Motor Off Motor Off
PROTECTION FAULT PRESENT — Motor Off —

Bulletin 291E

With the KeypadMode parameter (parameter 66) set to 1 = Maintained, pressing

the buttons reacts like a maintained switch.
Current Mode
Key Press OFF HAND AUTO
FWD/REV FWD LED Set REV LED — —
REV LED Set FWD LED
AUTO Auto Mode — Motor Off — —
HAND If no fault, Motor On — —
OFF Ignore Motor Off Motor Off
PROTECTION FAULT PRESENT Ignore Motor Off —

With the KeypadMode parameter (parameter 66) set to 0 = Momentary,

pressing the buttons reacts like a momentary switch.
Current Mode
Key Press OFF HAND AUTO
NO KEY PRESSED — Motor Off —
FWD/REV FWD LED Set REV LED — —
REV LED Set FWD LED
AUTO Auto Mode — Motor Off — —
HAND If no fault, Motor On — —
OFF — Motor Off Motor Off
PROTECTION FAULT PRESENT — Motor Off —

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Overview Chapter 1

Optional HOA Selector The HOA Selector Keypad with Jog function allows for local start/stop control
with capabilities to jog in forward/reverse motor directions.
Keypad with Jog Function
(Bulletin 294E only) Figure 15 - Bulletin 294E Jog/Forward/Reverse HOA

Keypad Local Control

With the KeypadMode parameter (parameter 66) set to 1 = Maintained, pressing
the buttons reacts like a maintained switch.
Current Mode
Key Press OFF HAND JOG AUTO
NO KEY PRESSED — — Motor Off —
FWD/REV FWD LED Set REV LED FWD LED Set REV LED — —
REV LED Set FWD LED REV LED Set FWD LED
JOG If no fault, Jog Motor — — —
AUTO Auto Mode — Motor Off — — —
HAND If no fault, Motor On — — —
OFF — Motor Off Motor Off Motor Off
PROTECTION FAULT PRESENT — Motor Off Motor Off —

With the KeypadMode parameter (parameter 66) set to 0 = Momentary,

pressing the buttons reacts like a momentary switch.
Current Mode
Key Press OFF HAND JOG AUTO
NO KEY PRESSED — Motor Off Motor Off —
FWD/REV FWD LED Set REV LED FWD LED Set REV LED — —
REV LED Set FWD LED REV LED Set FWD LED
JOG If no fault, Jog Motor — — —
AUTO Auto Mode — Motor Off — — —
HAND If no fault, Motor On — — —
OFF — Motor Off Motor Off Motor Off
PROTECTION FAULT PRESENT — Motor Off Motor Off —

IMPORTANT If multiple buttons are pressed at the same time, the software interprets this as
a “no button pressed” condition. The only exception to this rule is if multiple
buttons are pressed and one of them is the OFF button. If the OFF button is
pressed in combination with any combination of other buttons, the processor
will behave as if the OFF button were pressed by itself.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 37

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Keypad Disable Parameter

“Keypad Disable”, parameter 67, only inhibits the “HAND”, “FWD”, “REV” and
“JOG” buttons on the HOA keypad. The “OFF” and “AUTO” buttons are
always enabled, even if parameter 67 is set to “1=Disable”. The keypad OFF
button can not be disabled.

Source Brake Contactor An internal contactor is used to switch the electromechanical motor brake
On/Off. The motor brake contactor is actuated via the internal power which
and Connector supplies L1 and L2 voltage to the mechanical brake in the motor. The source
(Bulletin 294E only) brake can be configured for independent control via parameter configuration.

The internal contactor, electromechanical motor brake, and associated motor

branch cable are protected by the branch circuit protective device. There is no
resettable or replaceable protective device in ArmorStart LT.

WARNING: If the branch circuit protective device trips, the user must ensure
that the Source Brake function is still operational prior to putting the
equipment back in service. If the source brake function is not working properly,
loss of brake function or motor damage can occur.

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Chapter 2

Installation and Wiring

Receiving It is the responsibility of the user to thoroughly inspect the equipment before
accepting the shipment from the freight company. Check the item(s) received
against the purchase order. If any items are damaged, it is the responsibility of the
user not to accept delivery until the freight agent has noted the damage on the
freight bill. Should any concealed damage be found during unpacking, it is also
the responsibility of the user to notify the freight agent. The shipping container
must be left intact and the freight agent should be requested to make a visual
inspection of the equipment.

Unpacking Remove all packing material, wedges, or braces from within and around the
ArmorStart LT distributed motor controller and other device(s). Check the
contents of the package to see if all contents are included. Contact your local
Allen-Bradley representative if any items are missing.

IMPORTANT Before the installation and start-up of the drive, a general inspection
of mechanical integrity (i.e. loose parts, wires, connections, packing
materials, etc.) must be made.

Inspecting After unpacking, check nameplate catalog number(s) of the item(s) against the
purchase order. See Chapter 1 for an explanation of the catalog numbering system
which will aid in nameplate interpretation.

Storing The controller should remain in the shipping container prior to installation.
If the equipment is not to be used for a period of time, it must be stored according
to the following instructions in order to maintain warranty coverage.

• Store in a clean, dry location.

• Store within an ambient temperature range of –25…+85°C

(–13…+185°F).

• Store within a relative humidity range of 0…95%, noncondensing.

• Do not store equipment where it could be exposed to a corrosive

atmosphere.

• Do not store equipment in a construction area.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 39

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring

Installation Precautions The following statements must be read and understood.

ATTENTION: The earth ground terminal shall be connected to a solid earth

ground via a low-impedance connection.

ATTENTION: Copper ground conductors are recommended. The ArmorStart LT

external protective earth (PE) pad is aluminum. Refer to your local electrical
installation standard for proper bonding and protection when dissimilar metals
are used.

ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed controller can damage

components or reduce product life. Wiring or application errors, such as
undersizing the motor, incorrect or inadequate AC supply, or out of range
ambient temperatures, may result in malfunction of the system.

Precautions for
SHOCK HAZARD: To prevent electrical shock, open appropriate machine
Bulletin 290E/291E disconnect switch prior to connecting and disconnecting cables. Risk of shock —
Applications environment rating may not be maintained with open receptacles.

Precautions for
SHOCK HAZARD: The drive contains high voltage capacitors which take time
Bulletin 294E Applications to discharge after removal of mains supply. Before working on drive, ensure
isolation of mains supply from line inputs (L1, L2, L3). Wait three minutes
for capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels. Failure to do so may result
in personal injury or death.

Dimensions ArmorStart LT consists of three components that are non-replaceable. The

Electronic Control Module (ECM); a gland plate for wire entry; and the
aluminum alloy enclosure which makes up the back cover, top housing, and
wiring access door. The ECM includes communications, discrete I/O, status and
diagnostic LEDs, and the node address switches. All mating surfaces are sealed
using foam in place gasket or o-ring.

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2

Dimensions Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended
to be used for manufacturing purposes. All dimensions are subject to change.

Figure 16 - Dimensions for Bulletin 290E/291E

260
130 (10.2) 166,5
(5.1) (6.6)

217,83
(8.6)
202,05
(8.0) 170
(6.7)

152,65
65 (6.0)
(2.6) Front View Right Side View

Line Control
Motor
37
37 (1.5)
(1.5)
57,13
57,13 (2.3)
(2.3)
38,49
38.49 1 in. conduit opening (1.5)
(1.5) 24,25 48,5
24,25 0.75 in. conduit opening
(1.0) (1.9)
(1.0) 48,5
Conduit Gland Entrance ArmorConnect Media
(1.9)
Gland Entrance (optional)

Line
Line
Motor Motor Control
37 37 Source Brake
(1.5) (1.5)
57,13 57,13
(2.3) (2.3)
38,61 38,49 48,5
(1.5) 24,25
(1.0) (1.5) (1.9)
ArmorConnect Internal Power ArmorConnect Source Brake
Supply Gland Plate (optional) Gland Plate (optional)

IMPORTANT For proper heat dissipation and product operation, mount the ArmorStart LT in the
vertical orientation as shown.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 41

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring

Figure 17 - Dimensions for Bulletin 294E

381
240 (15.0)
(9.4)

219,32
206,43 (8.6)
(8.1)
170
(6.7)

120
(4.7)
Front View
202,27
(8.0)

37
(1.5)

92,9
(3.7)

38.49
(1.5) 1 in. conduit opening
24,25 48,5 0.75 in. conduit opening
(1.0) (1.9)
Conduit Gland Entrance - Bottom View Right Side View

Line Line
Control
Line
Motor Control
Motor Motor
37 37 37 Source Brake
(1.5) (1.5) (1.5)

92.9 92,9 92,9

(3.7) (3.7) (3.7)

38,55
38,61 (1.5) 24,25 38,55 48,5
(1.5) 24,25 (1.0) 48,5 (1.5) (1.9)
(1.0) (1.9)
ArmorConnect Internal Power ArmorConnect Media Gland ArmorConnect Gland Entrance
Supply Gland Plate (optional) Entrance (optional) with Source Brake (optional)

IMPORTANT For proper heat dissipation and product operation, mount the ArmorStart LT in the
vertical orientation as shown.

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2

Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended

to be used for manufacturing purposes. All dimensions are subject to change.

Figure 18 - ArmorStart LT Gland Plate Matrix

G1 Conduit G2 Media G3 Conduit
Standard Daisy Chaining
Cat. No.
U.S. Trade Knock-outs IP66 Metric Fittings
Dia. 25.5 mm
Dia. 20.5 mm
290-G3-A2
No Internal Power Supply 1.00 in.
No Source Brake (25.4 mm)
0.75 in.
(19.05 mm)
Dia. 25.5 mm
0.75 in. Dia. 20.5 mm
290-G3-A3
Source Brake (19.05 mm)
No Internal Power Supply

Dia. 25.5 mm
1.00 in. Dia. 20.5 mm 290-G3-A4
Internal Power Supply (25.4 mm)
No Source Brake 0.75 in.
(19.05 mm)

Dia. 25.5 mm
Dia. 20.5 mm
1.00 in. 290-G3-A5
Internal Power Supply (25.4 mm)
and Source Brake 0.75 in.
(19.05 mm)
45°

290-G3-A1
Gland Plate Clearances
Modifications are not permitted in the keepout region. Fitting(s) should be oriented 66.1 mm 80.7 mm
User Modified
so that they do not interfere with the enclosure when the gland plate is installed.
Torque the gland mounting screws to 12…14 in•lb (1.3…1.6 N•m).
10.1 mm 91.3 mm 11.8 mm

Connection Locations Figure 19 - Internal Power, Control, and Ground Locations

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 43

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring

Figure 20 - Gland Connection

Wiring Terminal Detail The power, control, and ground wire capacity and the tightening torque
requirements are shown in Table 8. The maximum number of connections
per terminal are shown in Table 7. As shown in Figure 21 all the terminals are
found in the wiring area. Access can be gained by removing the terminal access
cover plate.

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2

Figure 21 - ArmorStart LT Power and Control Terminals

L1 A1
L2 L3 A2 A3

T1
T2 T3

PE

B1 B2

Table 7 - Power, Control, and Ground Terminal Designations

Terminal Designations Wires/Connections Description
A1 2 Switched 24V DC Control Power (+) ➊
Wire Strip Length
0.35 ± 0.01 in. A2 2 Control Power Common (–) ➊
(9 ± 0.2 mm) A3 2 Unswitched 24V DC Control Power (+) ➊
PE 2 Ground
L1 2 Line Power – Phase A
L2 2 Line Power – Phase B
L3 2 Line Power – Phase C
T1 1 Motor Connection – Phase A
T2 1 Motor Connection – Phase B
T3 1 Motor Connection – Phase C
B1 1 Source Brake Connection – B1 ➋
B2 1 Source Brake Connection – B2 ➋

➊ When internal power supply option is selected, no connection is made here.

➋ Available only with Bulletin 294E.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 45

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring

Table 8 - Power, Control, and Ground Wire Capacity and the Tightening Torque Requirements
Wire Size (2) #18…#10 AWG (0.8…5.2 mm2) per terminal
Power Terminals
Tightening Torque 10.6 +/– 2 lb•in (1.2 +/– 0.2 N•m)
Wire Size #18…#10 AWG (0.8…5.2 mm2) per terminal
Motor Terminals
Tightening Torque 10.6 +/– 2 lb•in (1.2 +/– 0.2 N•m)
Wire Size (2) #18…#10 AWG (0.8…5.2 mm2) per terminal
Control Terminals
Tightening Torque 10.6 +/– 2 lb•in (1.2 +/– 0.2 N•m)
Wire Size (2) #16…#10 AWG (1.3…5.2 mm2) per terminal
PE/Ground
Tightening Torque 18 +/– 2 lb•in (2 +/– 0.2 N•m)
Wire Size #16 …#10 AWG (1.0…4.0 mm2) per terminal
Source Brake (Bulletin 294)
Tightening Torque 4.8 ± 2 lb•in (0.5 ± 0.2 N•m )

IMPORTANT ArmorStart LT is UL Listed for use with 14 AWG wire or preassemble power
cable. Refer to your local electrical code(s) when applying 16 AWG wire or cable
in a motor circuit.

Branch Circuit Protection

ATTENTION: Select the motor branch circuit protection that complies with the
NFPA79/ or NFPA70 (NEC) and any other governing regional or local codes.

The ArmorStart LT is Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Group Motor listed. Refer

to the product Specifications, Chapter 6 for maximum branch fuse and circuit
breaker ratings. Select the motor branch circuit protection device that complies
with NFPA70 (NEC) or NFPA79, and any other governing regional or local
codes. The installer shall observe the product nameplate markings and not apply
the ArmorStart LT where the maximum perspective short circuit current is
exceeded. The ArmorStart LT shall be applied to a solidly grounded WYE power
distribution system that does not exceed 480V AC, 60 Hz or 400V AC, 50 Hz.

WARNING: Do not install the ArmorStart LT where the maximum available

fault current exceeds the product rating.

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2

Typical System Example The primary function of ArmorStart LT is to control and protect a three-phase
squirrel cage induction motor. Three-phase power enters through terminals that
are connected to a manually operated disconnect switch. The three-phase power
may also connect internally to an optional three-phase to 24V DC power supply
(IPS). Wired in series with the disconnect is an electrically operated contactor or
a variable frequency drive. For Bulletin 294E an optional source brake contactor
may also be connected to the disconnect output terminals. The source brake
contactor is used to control an electromechanical brake physically attached to the
motor. The microcontroller and interface circuits are contained in the ECM.
The ECM also houses 6 user configurable I/O points. These six I/O points are
used for system level control and are accessible via by the communication
network or DeviceLogix.

The user has the flexibility to coordinate the appropriate safety function for their
application. ArmorStart LT does not provide a safe torque-off input. Therefore,
the safety function is configured externally from the controller and based upon
the risk assessment.

For example, the risk assessment may require a safety circuit with a high level
of performance. In this example, a safety relay with redundant safety contactors
and emergency stop function can be integrated into the machine controls.
Figure 22 below is an example of this configuration. Contact your local
Rockwell Automation supplier for additional support regarding the safety
circuit or for a risk assessment of your machinery.

Figure 22 -

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 47

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring

ArmorConnect Media For greater flexibility and faster installations the user may also use
ArmorConnect media for a complete plug-n-play solution. This solution
provides plug-in style stop stations, as shown in Figure 23. The ArmorConnect
power media offers both three-phase and control power cable cord set systems.
These include patchcords, receptacles, tees, reducers and accessories to be utilized
with the ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller. This cable system allows
quick connections and reduced installation time by utilizing pre-manufactured
cable assemblies for more reliable connection of the three phase and
control power.

IMPORTANT When specifying power media for use with the ArmorStart LT Distributed
Motor Controllers (Bulletin 290E/291E and Bulletin 294E) use only
ArmorConnect power media. The use of any other power media
will void the UL Listing of the motor controller.

IMPORTANT Refer to your local electrical code for proper application and protection of long
length power cable to minimize physical damage and appropriate short-circuit
and ground-fault protection for the assembly.

Figure 23 - ArmorConnect Configuration Example

IMPORTANT A single channel Stop is pictured. It is necessary to perform a risk assessment

and determine specific application requirements.

1. CAT5e Bulkhead Connector and Receptacle (Example Cat. No.:1585A-DD4JD)

2. CAT5e Patch Cord, IP67, M12 D-Code, Male Straight, Male Right Angle (Example Cat. No.: 1585D-M4TBDE-*)
3. CAT5e, Patch Cable, IP20, RJ45 Male to RJ45 Male (Example Cat. No. 1585J-M4TB-*)
4. Control Power Media Patchcords – PatchCord cable with integral female or male connector on each end (Example Cat. No.: 889N-F65GFNM-*)
5. Control Power Tees – The E-stop In Tee (Cat. No.: 898N-653ST-NKF) is used to connect to the Bulletin 800F On-Machine Stop station using
a control power media patchcord.

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2

6. The E-stop Out tee (Cat. No.: 898N-653ES-NKF) is used with cordset or patchcord to connect to the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller.
7. Control Power Receptacles – Female receptacles are a panel mount connector with flying leads (Cat. No.: 888N-D65AF1-*)
8. Three-Phase Power Trunk – Patchcord cable with integral female or male connector on each end (Example Cat. No.:280-PWRM35A-M*)
9. Three-Phase Drop Cable – PatchCord cable with integral female or male connector on each end (Example Cat. No.:280-PWRM22A-M*)
10. Three-Phase Power Tees and Reducer – Tee connects to a single drop line to trunk with quick change connectors (Cat. No.: 280-T35)
Reducing Tee connects to a single drop line (Mini) to trunk (Quick change) connector (Cat. No.: 280-RT35)
Reducer connects from quick change male connector to mini female connector (Cat. No.: 280-RA35)
11. Three-Phase Power Receptacles – Female receptacles are a panel mount connector with flying leads (Cat. No.: 280-M35F-M1)

IMPORTANT See the On-Machine Connectivity catalog for specific Ethernet

media components

Figure 24 - On-Machine Stop Stations

Enclosure Knockout Illumination Contact

Type Quick Connect Type Operator Voltage Configuration Cat. No.
Plastic 24V AC/DC 800F-1YMQ4
Mini Receptacle Metric Twist to Release 1 N.C./1 N.O.
Metal 24V AC/DC 800F-1MYMQ4

ArmorConnect Cable Ratings The ArmorConnect Power Media cables are rated per UL Type TC 600V 90°C
Dry 75°C Wet, Exposed Run (ER) or MTW 600V 90°C or STOOW 105°C
600V - Canadian Standards Association (CSA) STOOW 600V FT2.
For additional information regarding ArmorConnect Power Media refer
to ArmorStart LT selection guide, publication 290-SG001_-EN-P.

Branch Circuit Protection Requirements for ArmorConnect

Three-Phase Power Media

When using ArmorConnect Three-Phase Power Media, fuses or circuit breakers

may be used for the motor branch circuit ground fault protection if properly
sized and allowed by product labeling.

Circuit Breaker:

Where ArmorStart LT is used with ArmorConnect — suitable for use on a

circuit capable of delivering not more than 10000 RMS Symmetrical Amperes

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 49

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring

at 480Y/277 VAC maximum when protected by Cat. No.140U-D6D3-C30

circuit breaker, refer to the Specifications, Chapter 6.

WARNING: The total circuit impedance including each cable assembly's own
impedance, must be low enough to ensure any short-circuit or ground fault
current that can flow through any assembly, will be large enough to operate the
magnetic trip of the Cat. No. 140U-D63-C* circuit breaker. Refer to NFPA 70 and
NFPA 79 or your local electrical code for guidance in coordinating over current
protective devices and the circuit being protected.

Fusing:

Where ArmorStart LT is used with ArmorConnect — suitable for use on a

circuit capable of delivering not more than 10000 RMS Symmetrical Amperes
(SCCR) at 480/277 V AC maximum when protected by 40 A CC, J, and T
class fuses, refer to the Specifications, Chapter 6.

Electrical Wiring ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP utilizes 24V DC control power for communications
and I/O. The control power terminal connections are labeled A1, A2, and A3.
Switched power (A1) will supply outputs and motor control. Unswitched
power (A3) will supply logic power, communications, and sensor inputs.

IMPORTANT EtherNet/IP is an unpowered network, therefore if device status is important,

the A3 terminal must have an unswitched power source.

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2

Figure 25 - Bulletin 290E Full Voltage

At Motor
Disconnect DOL
Overload
L1 T1
L2 T2
Motor
L3 T3
Disconnect Status
Fwd Status
Fwd Control

Disconnect
State,
Voltage
Monitoring Micro Internal Internal
and Power Loss Outputs Inputs

PE Power EtherNet/IP
Conditioning Logic
Board
Power
Switched A1 Loss
(SW)
A2 External External
Common Outputs Inputs
A3
Un-
Switched Sensor Voltage
(USW) Sinking
Input or 1 2
Sourcing
output 5
4 3
Common
6-User Configurable I/O Points

Figure 26 - Bulletin 291E Full Voltage Reversing

At Motor
Disconnect Reverser
Overload
L1 T1
L2 T2
Motor
L3 T3
Disconnect Status
Fwd & Rev
Status
Fwd & Rev
Control

Disconnect
State,
Voltage
Monitoring Micro Internal Internal
and Power Loss Outputs Inputs

PE Power EtherNet/IP
Conditioning Logic
Board
Power
Switched A1 Loss
(SW)
A2 External External
Common) Outputs Inputs
A3
Un-
Switched Sensor Voltage
(USW) Sinking
Input or
Sourcing 1 2
output 5
4 3
Common
6-User Configurable I/O Points

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 51

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring

Figure 27 - Bulletin 294E VFD

At Motor
Disconnect
L1 T1
L1 T1
L2 T2
L2 T2 Motor
L3 T3
L3 T3
TB2
1
Drive J3
Enable 11
Disconnect Status

Disconnect
State,
Voltage
Monitoring Micro Internal Fan Internal
and Power Loss Outputs Inputs

PE Power EtherNet/IP
Conditioning Logic
Board
Power
Switched A1 Loss
(SW)
A2 External External
Common) Outputs Inputs
A3
Un-
Switched Sinking
(USW) Input or Sensor Voltage
Sourcing
output
1 2
5
4 3
Common
6-User Configurable I/O pOINTS

Figure 28 - Bulletin 294E VFD with -SB

At Motor
Disconnect
L1 T1
L1 T1
L2 T2
L2 T2 Motor
L3 T3
L3 T3
TB2
Brake
1 J3
Drive B1
Enable 11
Disconnect Status B2
#16 AWG Minimum
Brake Status 40A BCPD max
Brake
Control

Disconnect
State,
Voltage
Monitoring Micro Fan Internal Internal
and Power Loss Outputs Inputs

PE Power EtherNet/IP
Conditioning Logic
Board
Power
Switched A1 Loss
(SW)
A2 External External
Common Outputs Inputs
A3
Un-
Switched Sinking
(USW) Input or Sensor Voltage
Sourcing
output 1 2
5
4 3
Common
6-User Configurable I/O Points

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2

Figure 29 - Bulletin 290E Full Voltage with -IPS

At Motor
Disconnect DOL
Overload
L1 T1
L2 T2
Motor
L3 T3
Disconnect Status
Fwd Status
Fwd Control

Disconnect
State,
1 Voltage
Monitoring Micro Internal Internal
and Power Loss Outputs Inputs
PE EtherNet/IP
Logic
Power
Loss 4
1 External External
2 Outputs Inputs
3
Sensor Voltage
Sinking
Input or 1 2
Sourcing
output 5
4 3
Common
6-User Configurable I/O Points

Figure 30 - Bulletin 291E Full Voltage Reversing with -IPS

At Motor
Disconnect Reverser
Overload T1
L1
L2 T2
Motor
L3 T3
Disconnect Status
Fwd & Rev
Status
Fwd & Rev
Control

Disconnect
State,
Voltage
Monitoring Micro Internal Internal
and Power Loss Outputs Inputs

PE EtherNet/IP
Logic
Power
Loss 4
1 External External
2 Outputs Inputs
3
Sinking Sensor Voltage
Input or
Sourcing 1 2
output 5
4 3
Common
6-User Configurable I/O Points

Figure 31 - Bulletin 294E VFD with -IPS

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 53

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring

At Motor
Disconnect
L1 T1
L1 T1
L2 T2
L2 T2 Motor
L3 T3
L3 T3
TB2
1
Drive J3
Enable 11
Disconnect Status

Disconnect
State,
Voltage
Monitoring Micro Internal Fan Internal
and Power Loss Outputs Inputs

PE EtherNet/IP
Logic
Power
Loss 4
1
External External
2 Outputs Inputs
3
Sinking
Input or Sensor Voltage
Sourcing
output 1 2
5
4 3
Common
6-User Configurable I/O Points

Figure 32 - Bulletin 294E VFD with -IPS, -SB

At Motor
Disconnect
L1 T1
L1 T1
L2 T2
L2 T2 Motor
L3 T3
L3 T3
TB2
Brake
Drive 1 J3
Enable B1
11
Disconnect Status B2
#16 AWG Minimum
Brake Status
40A BCPD max
Brake
Control

Disconnect
State,
Voltage
Monitoring Fan Internal Internal
and Power Loss Micro Outputs Inputs

PE EtherNet/IP
Logic
Power
Loss 4
1
External External
2 Outputs Inputs
3
Sinking
Input or Sensor Voltage
Sourcing
output 1 2
5
4 3
Common

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2

Group Motor Installations for When ArmorStart LT is applied according to group motor installation
requirements, two or more motors of any rating or controller type, are permitted
USA and Canada Markets on a single branch circuit. Group Motor Installation has been successfully used
for many years in the USA and Canada.

IMPORTANT For additional information regarding group motor installations with the
ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller, see Appendix A

Wiring Cable Workmanship Guidelines

In addition to conduit and seal-tite raceway, it is acceptable to utilize cable that is

dual rated Tray Cable Exposed Runs (TC-ER) and Cord, STOOW, for power
and control wiring on ArmorStart LT installations. In the USA and Canada
installations, the following guidance is outlined by the National Electrical Code
(NEC) and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 79.

In industrial establishments where the conditions of maintenance and

supervision ensure that only qualified persons service the installation, and where
the exposed cable is continuously supported and protected against physical
damage using mechanical protection, such as struts, angles, or channels, Type TC
tray cable that complies with the crush and impact requirements of Type MC
(Metal Clad) cable and is identified for such use with the marking Type TC-ER
(Exposed Run)➊ shall be permitted between a cable tray and the utilization
equipment or device as open wiring. The cable shall be secured at intervals
not exceeding 6 ft (1.8 m) and installed in a “good workman-like” manner.
Equipment grounding for the utilization equipment shall be provided
by an equipment grounding conductor within the cable.

While the ArmorStart LT is intended for installation in factory floor

environments of industrial establishments, the following must be taken into
consideration when locating the ArmorStart LT in the application:

• Cables, including those for control voltage including 24V DC and

communications, are not to be exposed to an operator or building traffic
on a continuous basis.

• Location of the ArmorStart LT to minimize exposure to continual traffic

is recommended. If location to minimize traffic flow is unavoidable, other
barriers to minimize inadvertent exposure to the cabling should be
considered.

• Routing cables should be done in such a manner to minimize inadvertent

exposure and/or damage.

• If conduit or other raceways are not used, it is recommended that strain

relief fittings be utilized when installing the cables for the control and
power wiring through the conduit openings.

➊ Historically cable meeting these crush and impact requirements was designated and marked “Open Wiring.” Cable so marked is
equivalent to the present Type TC-ER and can be used.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 55

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring

Service Space

The working space around the ArmorStart LT can be minimized as the

ArmorStart LT does not require examination, adjustment, servicing or
maintenance while energized. In lieu of this service, the ArmorStart LT
is meant to be unplugged and replaced after proper lock-out/tag-out
procedures have been employed.

Hand Operation (HOA) Considerations

The Hand/Off/Auto (HOA) is a factory-installed option that the user may

select. The HOA keypad may require the ArmorStart LT to be installed as
follows, if the application requires frequent use of the hand operated interface
by the equipment operator:

1. Install not less than 2 ft (0.6 m) above the servicing level and within easy
reach of the operator, who is in a normal working position.
2. Install where the operator is not placed in a hazardous situation when
operating the equipment.
3. Install where the possibility of inadvertent operation is minimized.

Where inadvertent operation may cause adverse effects the HOA can be disabled
via parameter 67.

General Wiring Wire in an industrial control application can be divided into three groups: power,
control, and signal. The following recommendations for physical separation
Considerations between these groups is provided to reduce the coupling effect:

• Minimum spacing between different wire groups in the same tray should
be 6 in. (16 cm).

• Wire runs outside an enclosure should be run in conduit or have shielding/

armor with equivalent attenuation.

• Different wire groups should be run in separate conduits.

• Minimum spacing between conduits containing different wire groups

should be 3 in. (8 cm).

• Minimum spacing between 3-phase power cabling and Ethernet

or I/O cabling should be at least 6 in. (16 cm) to avoid noise issues,
unless properly shielded.

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2

Grounding An effectively grounded product is one that is “intentionally connected to earth

through a ground connection or connections of sufficiently low impedance and
having sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent the buildup of voltages
which may result in undue hazard to connected equipment or to persons” (as
defined by the US National Electric Code NFPA70, Article 100B). Grounding
is done for two basic reasons: safety (defined above) and noise containment or
reduction. While the safety ground scheme and the noise current return circuit
may sometimes share the same path and components, they should be considered
different circuits with different requirements.

Grounding Safety Grounds

The object of safety grounding is to ensure that all metalwork is at the same
ground (or Earth) potential at power frequencies. Impedance between the drive
and the building scheme ground must conform to the requirements of national
and local industrial safety regulations or electrical codes. These will vary based
on country, type of distribution system and other factors. Periodically check the
integrity of all ground connections.

General safety dictates that all metal parts are connected to earth with separate
copper wire or wires of the appropriate gauge. Most equipment has specific
provisions to connect a safety ground or PE (protective earth) directly to it.

Grounding PE or Ground

The safety ground - PE must be connected to earth ground. This point must
be connected to an adjacent building steel (girder, joist), a floor ground rod, a bus
bar or a building ground grid. Grounding points must comply with national and
local industrial safety regulations or electrical codes. Some codes may require
redundant ground paths and periodic examination of connection integrity.

IMPORTANT To avoid electrolytic corrosion on the external earth terminal, avoid spraying
moisture directly on the terminal. When used in washdown environments
apply a sealant or other corrosion inhibitor on the external ground terminal
to minimize any negative effects of galvanic or electro-chemical corrosion.x
Ground connections should be inspected on a regular basis.

Grounding Motors

The motor frame or stator core must be connected directly to the PE connection
with a separate ground conductor. It is recommended that each motor frame be
grounded to building steel at the motor.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 57

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring

Power Distribution The type of transformer and the connection configuration feeding an
ArmorStart LT Bulletin 294E plays an important role in its performance
and safety.

Delta/Wye with Grounded Wye Neutral

Figure 33 -

Delta/Wye with Grounded Wye Neutral is the most common type of

distribution system. The grounded neutral provides a direct path for common
mode current caused by the drive output.

SHOCK HAZARD: ArmorStart LT requires the use of grounded Wye

power systems.

AC Line Voltage Incoming voltage imbalances greater than 2% can cause large unequal currents
in a drive. An input line reactor may be necessary when line voltage imbalances
are greater than 2%.

Line Reactor In general, ArmorStart LT does not require line reactors. In most applications,
the ArmorStart LT is further away from the power distribution panel, therefore
the length of cable provides additional impedance as compared to an in-panel
solution.

Therefore, ArmorStart LT does not define a minimum line impedance

specification, and does not require a line reactor. Its design trades the external
reactor supplied by the customer for an internal fan integral to the controller.
This improves the overall life of the product. To achieve maximum electrical life
of Bulletin 294, a minimum 800 uH line reactor for the group can be applied to
extend total service life.

In addition, if line disturbance mitigation is also necessary, the ArmorStart LT is

equipped with an EMI filter and when used with a shielded motor cable reduces
the impact of the power switching components. For CE compliant installations

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2

refer to the recommended EMI/RFI cord grip accessory or quick disconnect

shielded motor cable. Contact your local sales representative for details.

If however, the customer specifications require input line reactors or transformers,

the recommendation is to group the ArmorStarts at the distribution panel under
one line reactor (not individual reactors or transformers). Keep in mind where
full voltage ArmorStarts are included with VFD ArmorStarts, the starting
currents of the full voltage ArmorStarts can be significant. The current must be
accounted for in the selection of the line reactor or you run the risk of nuisance
undervoltage faults of the VFD ArmorStarts while the full voltage ArmorStarts
are starting their motors.

ATTENTION: For 50°C ambients ArmorStart LT must be derated and applied

with a minimum of 800 uH to1200 uH line reactor. Failure to follow this
application requirement will result in premature product failure. Contact your
local Rockwell Automation representative for assistance.

Bulletin 294 Motor Cable The majority of recommendations regarding drive cable address issues are caused
by the nature of the drive output. A PWM drive creates AC motor current by
Considerations sending DC voltage pulses to the motor in a specific pattern. These pulses
affect the wire insulation and can be a source of electrical noise. The rise time,
amplitude, and frequency of these pulses must be considered when choosing a
wire/cable type. The choice of cable must consider:

1. The effects of the drive output once the cable is installed

2. The need for the cable to contain noise caused by the drive output
3. The amount of cable charging current available from the drive
4. Possible voltage drop (and subsequent loss of torque)
for long wire runs

Keep the motor cable lengths less than 45 ft from the ArmorStart LT.

Unshielded Cable
Properly designed multi-conductor cable can provide superior performance
in wet applications, significantly reduce voltage stress on wire insulation and
reduce cross coupling between drives.

The use of cables without shielding is generally acceptable for installations

where electrical noise created by the drive does not interfere with the operation
of other devices such as: communications cards, photoelectric switches, weigh
scales, and others. Be certain the installation does not require shielded cable
to meet specific EMC standards for CE, C-Tick or FCC. Cable specifications
depend on the installation type.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 59

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring

Figure 34 - Unshielded Multi-Conductor Cable

Filler PVC Outer
Sheath
W B

R G
Single Ground
Conductor

Shielded Cable

Shielded cable contains all of the general benefits of multi-conductor cable

with the added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much
of the noise generated by a typical AC Drive. Strong consideration for shielded
cable should be given for installations with sensitive equipment such as weigh
scales, capacitive proximity switches, and other devices that may be affected
by electrical noise in the distribution system. Applications with large numbers
of drives in a similar location, imposed EMC regulations, or a high degree
of communications/networking are also good candidates for shielded cable.

An acceptable shielded cable will have 4 XLPE insulated conductors with a

100% coverage foil and an 85% coverage copper braided shield (with drain wire)
surrounded by a PVC jacket.

Figure 35 - Shielded Cable with Four Conductors

Drain Wire

Shield

W G

R B

Recommended Cable Connectors/Glands

Choose cable connectors or glands that offer the best cable protection, shield
termination, and ground contact.

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2

Recommended Cord Grips

The following are recommended cord grips to be used

for ArmorStart LT installations.

Table 9 - Cord grip for Motor, Power, and Control

Recommended Thomas and Betts Cord Grips for G1 and G3 Glands.

Thomas and Betts Part Nos.

Knockout Sealing
Cord Grip Lock Nut
Description Gland Size Cable Diameter Range (in.2) Ring
Motor/Source Brake G1 0.75 in. 0.500…0.750 2932NM 5263 142TB
Motor/Source Brake G1 0.75 in. 0.660…0.780 2675 5263 142TB
Power G1 1.0 in. 0.660…0.780 2676 5264 143
Power G1 1.0 in. 0.770…0.895 2677 5264 143
Control Power, Motor/Source
G3 M20 0.236…0.473 CC-ISO20-G ➊ GMN-M20
Brake
3-Phase Power G3 M25 0.512…0.709 CC-ISO25-G ➊ GMN-M25
➊ Contact Thomas and Betts for product selection details

Shield Terminating Connectors

The cable connector selected must provide good 360o contact and low transfer
impedance from the shield or armor of the cable to the conduit entry plate at
both the motor and the ArmorStart LT for electrical bonding. SKINTOP ®
MS-SC/MS-SCL cable grounding connectors and NPT/PG adapters from
LAPPUSA are good examples of this type of shield terminating gland.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 61

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring

Figure 36 - Terminating the Shield with a Connector

Metal connector body

Braid wires pulled back in a 360° pattern
makes direct contact with
around the ground cone of the connector
the braid wires

U (T1) Ground Bushing

V (T2)
W (T3)
PE
One or More
Ground Leads

Metal locknut bonds the Drain wires pulled back in a 360° pattern
connector to the panel around the ground cone of the connector

ATTENTION: Shielded connector or motor cable is mandatory for CE compliant

installations.

Electromagnetic The following guidelines are provided for EMC installation compliance.
Compatibility (EMC)
General Notes (Bulletin 294E only)
• The motor cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid
electromagnetic emissions as well as capacitive currents. CE conformity
of ArmorStart LT with EMC directive does not guarantee the entire
machine installation complies with CE EMC requirements. Many
factors can influence total machine/installation compliance.

• The EMI filter may result in relatively high ground leakage currents.
Therefore, ArmorStart LT must only be applied in installations that are
solidly grounded (bonded) to the building power distribution ground.

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2

ATTENTION: RFI Filter Grounding. Due to the presence of an integral EMI

filter, this product may draw more that 3.5 mA of leakage current. The controller
must only be used in installations with grounded AC supply systems and be
permanently installed and solidly grounded (bonded) to the building power
distribution ground. Grounding should not include any form of plug or socket
that would permit inadvertent disconnection. Consult your local codes
regarding redundant ground connections and/or size of protective earthing
conductor. The integrity of all connections should be periodically checked.

Ethernet, DeviceNet, and DeviceNet Connector (M18)

I/O Connections

Pin 1 – Drain (no connection)

Pin 2 – +VDNET
Pin 3 – -VDNET
Pin 4 – CAN_H
Pin 5– CAN_L

Ethernet/IP Connector D-coded (M12) I/O Connector (M12)

M12 Female Ethernet Connector Pin 1 – Sensor Source Voltage

Pin 1 – Tx+ Pin 2 – Not Used
Pin 2 – Rx+ Pin 3 – Common
Pin 3 – Tx– Pin 4 – Input or Output
4 3 Pin 4 – Rx– Pin 5 – Not Used

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 63

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring

ArmorConnect Power ArmorStart LT utilizes a M22 male receptacle for power inputs and a M22
female receptacle for motor or motor brake output.
Media Receptacles Motor Connector (optional)

Pin 1 - T1 (black)
Pin 2 - T2 (white)
Pin 3 - T3 (red)
Pin 4 - Ground (green/yellow)

Source Brake Connector (optional)

Pin 1 - Ground (green/yellow)

Pin 2 - B1(black)
Pin 3 -B2 (white)

Incoming Control Power (optional) – 24V DC Only

Pin 1 – (+V) Unswitched (A3/red)

Pin 2 – (–V) Common (A2/black)
Pin 3 – Not used (green)
Pin 4 – Not used (blank)
Pin 5 – (+V) Switched (A1/blue)
Pin 6 – Not used (white)

Incoming Three-Phase Power (optional)

Pin 1 - L1 (black)
Pin 2 - L2 (white)
Pin 3 - L3 (red)
Pin 4 - Ground (green/yellow)

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Installation and Wiring Chapter 2

Optional Locking Clip The locking clip is an optional device that can be used, if desired. The clam shell
design clips over power quick disconnect connections to limit customer access to
disconnection.

Figure 37 -

SHOCK HAZARD: DO NOT connect or disconnect power or motor connections

while power is applied to ArmorStart LT. Proper Lock-Out Tag-Out procedures
should be followed to reduced the risk of severe injury.

SHOCK HAZARD: The ArmorStart LT local disconnect will only isolate the motor
power and remove switched power when turned OFF. Power inputs must be
switched OFF properly from their respective sources before connection or
disconnection of incoming power. Proper Lock-Out Tag-Out procedures should
be followed to reduced the risk of severe injury.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 65

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring

Notes:

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Chapter 3

Product Commissioning

IP Address The IP address identifies each node on the IP network (or system of connected
networks). Each TCP/IP node on a network must have a unique IP address.

The IP address is 32 bits long and has a net ID part and Host ID part. Networks
are classified A, B, C, (or other). The class of the network determines how an IP
address is formatted.

Figure 38 - IP Address on the IP Network

0 78 31
Class A 0 Net ID Host ID
0 15 16 31
Class B 10 Net ID Host ID

0 23 24 31
Class C 110 Net ID Host ID

You can distinguish the class of the IP address from the first integer in its
dotted-decimal IP address as follows:

Range of first integer Class Range of first integer Class

0…127 A 192…223 C
128…191 B 224…255 other

Each node on the same physical network must have an IP address of the same
class and must have the same net ID. Each node on the same network must have
a different Host ID thus giving it a unique IP address.

Gateway Address

The Gateway Address is the default address of a network. It provides a single

domain name and point of entry to the site. Gateways connect individual physical
networks into a system of networks.

Subnet Mask

The subnet mask is used for splitting IP networks into a series of subgroups,
or subnets. The mask is a binary pattern that is matched up with the IP address
to turn part of the Host ID address field into a field for subnets.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 67

Chapter 3 Product Commissioning

Configuring EtherNet/IP Address Before using the ArmorStart LT, you may need to configure an IP address, subnet
mask, and optional Gateway address. The rotary network address switches found
on the front of the ECM, are set to 999 and DHCP is enabled as the factory
default. The network Internet Protocol (IP) address can be set one of three ways:

• Use the switches located on the module

• Use a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server, such as

Rockwell Automation BootP/DHCP

• Retrieve a static IP address from nonvolatile memory

The ArmorStart LT reads these switches first at power up or after a reset to

determine if they are set to a valid IP address between 1…254. When switches are
set to a valid number the IP address will be 192.168.1._ _ _ [switch setting].

If the switches are set to an invalid number (for example, 000 or a value greater
than 254 excluding 888), DHCP is enabled. The DHCP server will assign the
IP address and the Transport Control Protocol (TCP) parameters.

The RS Logix 5000 installation provides a BootP/DHCP server found

in the Rockwell Software Program folder. Use Rockwell Automation BootP/
DHCP server utility, version 2.3 or later, that ships with RSLogix™ 5000
or RSLinx software.

A third party DHCP server can also be used.

Manually Configure the Network Address Switches

Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches.

Figure 39 - Switches on the I/O module

Set the network address by adjusting the three rotary switches on the front
of the ECM. When the IP address switches are valid, the subnet mask will be

68 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Commissioning Chapter 3

255.255.255.0 and the gateway address is set to 0.0.0.0. A power cycle is required
for any new IP address to take effect when the switches are used.

ATTENTION: To avoid unintended operation, the ArmorStart LT

must be assigned a fixed IP address. If a DHCP server is used, it must
be configured to assign a fixed IP address for ArmorStart LT.
Failure to observe this precaution may result in unintended machine
motion or loss of process control.

Figure 40 - Network Address Example

0 0 0
8 28 28 2 This example shows the
IP address set to 000 (DHCP).

6 46 46 4
X100 X10 X1

Static Address Alternative

If the manual address configuration of 192.168.1.xxx is not acceptable, a static

address can be configured using the embedded web page. First configure the
switches to a valid address to access the web page. Using a common web browser
enter the address 192.168.1._ _ _ (switches). From the Administrative Settings
window select Network Configuration. Change the Ethernet Interface
Configuration to “Static” and enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default
Gateway and apply. Change the ArmorStart LT address switches to 999. The unit
will now accept the new IP address. To access the web page you will need to use
the new address in the web browser.

The switch value of 888 allows the user to reset to factory default configuration
including configuration parameters. This setting is useful in situations where the
user wishes to decommission a module or when the user wishes to commission a
previously-used module that has an unknown configuration. When the switches
are set to 888, upon the next power cycle the ArmorStart LT will return to
factory default settings and cease all communications. The Module Status LED
shall transition to blinking red and the Network Status LED shall transition
to OFF.

After reset, the user will then need to change the IP address to a valid setting and
power cycle. The purpose of this is to prevent the user from resetting the module
and then never changing the switch setting from 888.

IMPORTANT Setting the IP address to “888” followed by a power cycle will reset the device
to its factory default configuration. To resume network communication the
address MUST be set to DHCP or a valid IP address and power cycled again.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 69

Chapter 3 Product Commissioning

Using the The Rockwell Automation BootP/DHCP utility is a stand alone program that
incorporates the functionality of standard BootP/DHCP software with a user
Rockwell Automation friendly graphical interface. It is located in the Utils directory on the
BootP/DHCP Utility RSLogix 5000 installation CD. The ArmorStart LT must have DHCP
enabled (factory default) to use the utility.

To configure your adapter using the BootP/DHCP utility, perform the following
steps:

1. Run the BootP/DHCP software.

In the BOOTP/DHCP Request History panel you will see the Ethernet
(Mac) addresses of the devices issuing requests.
Note: the Ethernet (Mac) address for a device can be found
on the product label.

Figure 41 - BOOTP/DHCP Request History Panel

2. Double-click the Ethernet (Mac) address of the device you want

to configure.
You will see the New Entry dialog with the device’s Ethernet Address
(MAC).

Figure 42 - New Entry Dialog Box

70 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Commissioning Chapter 3

3. Enter the IP Address you want to assign to the device, and click OK.
The device is added to the Relation List, displaying the Ethernet
Address (MAC) and corresponding IP Address, Hostname, and
Description (if applicable).

Figure 43 - Relation List

When the address displays in the IP Address column in the Request

History section, it signifies that the IP address assignment has been made.
4. To assign this configuration to the device, highlight the device in the
Relation List panel, and click the Disable BOOTP/DHCP button.
When power is cycled to the device, it uses the configuration you assigned
and does not issue a DHCP request.
5. To enable DHCP for a device with DHCP disabled, highlight the device
in the Relation List, and click the Enable DHCP button.
You must have an entry for the device in the Relation List
panel to re-enable DHCP.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 71

Chapter 3 Product Commissioning

Figure 44 - Enable DHCP Button

Save the Relation List

You can save the Relation List to use later. To save the Relation List perform the
following steps:

1. Select Save As... from the File menu.

Figure 45 - Save Relation List

You will see the Save As Dialog.

72 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Commissioning Chapter 3

Figure 46 - Save As Dialog Box

2. Select the folder you want to Save in.

3. Enter a File name for the Relation List (for example, Control System
Configuration), and click Save.
You can leave the Save as type at the default setting: Bootp
You can then open the file containing the Relation List at a later session.

When DHCP is enabled (factory default Enabled), the unit will request its
network configuration from a DHCP/BOOTP server. Any configuration
received from a DHCP server will be stored in non-volatile memory.

The unit will try to obtain the same IP address from the DHCP server. If the
server is not present (e.g., server fails to power up), the unit will use the IP address
it previously received from the server. The DHCP timeout = 30 s.

Be cautious about using an unmanaged switch to assign the IP address. A DHCP

server typically assigns a finite lease time to the offered IP address. The possibility
exists that the ArmorStart LT would be assigned a different IP address which
would cause a stop in communication with the controller.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 73

Chapter 3 Product Commissioning

Embedded Web Server The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data.

IMPORTANT The user should set the password to a unique value for authorized
personnel.
If the login and password are lost you will need to reset the device
to the factory defaults, which results in losing its configuration.

To access the internal web browser, open your computer’s internet browser and
enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart LT (for example, 192.168.1.1).

Figure 47 - Internal Web Browser

From here you are able to view parameter settings, device status, and diagnostics
from multiple tab views.

74 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Commissioning Chapter 3

Network Configuration

To access the network configuration, you will be prompted to login to the

Administrative Setting.

Figure 48 - Enter Network Password

The user will be prompted to enter the default User Name (Administrator).
The factory default password is blank. The user is expected to change the
password to avoid unauthorized access.

Figure 49 - Network Configurations

From this screen you can change the Ethernet Configuration. For example
in the above image the IP address will be changed to 10.10.10.101. Choose
“APPLY Changes” for new settings to take effect.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 75

Chapter 3 Product Commissioning

Parameter Configuration

ArmorStart LT embedded web server provides the user the ability to view and
modify the device configuration without having to access RSLogix 5000. To view
the device configuration from the web server, select the parameters folder.

Figure 50 -

In the figure above, the Starter Setup parameters are viewed. To modify a
parameter the user will click the “Edit” button.

Figure 51 - Enter Network Password

The user will be prompted to enter the default User Name (Administrator).
The factory default password is blank. The user is expected to change the
Password to avoid unauthorized access.

E-mail Notification Configuration

ArmorStart LT internal web server will support the e-mailing of warning and
trip messages via Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP). The configuration
parameters for the SMTP Server’s IP address, user login, and port number are
configurable through the Administrative Settings page of the internal web server.
The user will configure the device name, device description, and device trip type.

76 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Commissioning Chapter 3

Figure 52 - E-mail Notification Configuration

E-mail triggers:
• when a trip occurs
• when a trip is cleared
• when a warning occurs
• when a warning is cleared

IMPORTANT “Cleared Event” e-mails will only be sent when all events have been cleared
and if a trip event e-mail has previously been sent.

The following is an example trip e-mail:

Subject: ArmorStart LT 291E 1.1-7.6A has detected an Overload Trip

Body: Trip Snapshot:

SnapShotL1Amps: 1.11 Amps
SnapShotL2Amps: 2.22 Amps
SnapShotL3Amps: 3.33 Amps
SnapShotAveAmps: 2.22 Amps
SnapShot%Thermal: 55%

Trip Type: Overload Trip

Trip Info: Load has drawn excessive current based on the trip
class selected.

Device Name: ArmorStart LT 291E Test Unit

Device Description:Latest AB On-Machine Offering

Device Location: Sixth Floor Comms Lab

Contact Info: Contact 1 Info: Slicia Turnbull in California

Contact 2 Info: Steve Plummer on Friday

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 77

Chapter 3 Product Commissioning

How to Add a New Module ArmorStart LT is provided with an Add-On Profile (AOP). An Add-on profile
streamlines the programming and installation by eliminating the task of
Using the Add-On Profile individually configuring the device tags and providing an easy to use
configuration interface. In addition, the copy and paste function allows easy
configuration of multiple ArmorStart LTs with RSLogix™ 5000 revision 17.01
or later. There is a known compatibility issue with revision 20.0. Update RSLogix
5000 to 20.1 or greater.

IMPORTANT If your version of RSLogix 5000 does not include the AOP for ArmorStart LT, it
can be installed from http://support.rockwellautomation.com/controlflash/
LogixProfiler.asp

1. Launch RS Logix 5000

2. From the “I/O Configuration” tree add a “New Module”

78 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Commissioning Chapter 3

3. From the list of modules find the ArmorStart LT using the catalog number.
The AOP will include all options therefore the list will only display the base
catalog number.

4. The “General” page is displayed. Enter a descriptive name for the

ArmorStart LT.

5. In the “General” page enter the ArmorStart LT IP address. The “Private

Address” corresponds to the local IP address configurations using the switches.
The “IP Address” is a static address but configured from the webpage. This allows
more flexibility in defining the address. If the address is served up, use “Host
Name” field.

6. In the “General” page, select the “Change” button. From here, define what
options are available and what discrete point, if any, will need to be defined
as an output.

The “General” page of the ArmorStart LT AOP differs from many other product
AOPs. The Module definition allows the user to specify the following items:
• Electronic Keying: Module Compatibility
• Configured By: RSLogix 5000 or ArmorStart LT Embedded Web Page
• Connection Type: Data or Listen Only

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 79

Chapter 3 Product Commissioning

• User I/O Configuration: Specify the Input or Output use for each I/O
point
• Keypad Option: Is product supplied with this option
• Electro-Mechanical Brake Option: Is product supplied with this option

The figure below is an example of the Module Definition page.

Electronic Keying

The electronic keying feature automatically compares the expected module, as

shown in the RSLogix 5000 I/O Configuration tree, to the physical module
before I/O communication begins. You can use electronic keying to help prevent
communication to a module that does not match the type and revision expected.
Typically, three keying options are available:
• Exact Match
Exact Match keying requires all keying attributes, that is, Vendor, Product
Type, Product Code (catalog number), Major Revision, and Minor
Revision, of the physical module and the module created in the software
to match precisely to establish communication.
• Compatible Keying
Compatible Keying indicates that the module determines whether to
accept or reject communication. Compatible Keying is the default setting.
• Disable Keying
Disabled Keying indicates the keying attributes are not considered when
attempting to communicate with a module.

ATTENTION: Be extremely cautious when using Disabled Keying; if used incorrectly,

this option can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.

IMPORTANT Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the I/O communication
connection to the module to be disrupted and may result in a loss of data.

80 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Commissioning Chapter 3

Connections

Two Class 1 connections for I/O transfer will be supported and six Class 3
explicit connections will be supported. The Class 1 connections are:
• Data
• Listen Only

Only one Data connection is allowed. A maximum of two Listen Only

connections are supported (shared with the Data connection). This connection
type is dependent on another connection to exist. If that connection (Data) is
closed, the listen only connection shall be closed as well.

The connection sizes are:

ArmorStart Connection Type Connection Size (in bytes)

Input 16
Bulletin290E/291E
Output 3
Input 18
Bulletin 294E
Output 6

Configured by

The ArmorStart LT may be configured via the ArmorStart LT’s web page or
RS Logix 5000. Often times, customers utilize the web interface to configure
the unit before it is ever connected to the PLC. The AOP will require the user
to specify how the ArmorStart LT is configured, once added to RS Logix 5000.
The valid options are:
• “Web Page” — The unit is configured by the ArmorStart LT’s web pages.
The AOP will NOT display any page or content of a page that allows
configuration of the unit. In this mode Connection Type will include a
“Backup” and “Restore” feature. The Backup selection will store parameter
data in the RSLogix 5000 programming file and in the PLC. The Restore
selection will allow the user to manually re-configure a replacement unit.
• “RSLogix 5000” — The unit is configured by RSLogix 5000. The AOP
controls all parameter configurations. Any change made using the webpage
will be over written by the PLC configuration. When the user changes the
“Configured By” field from “Web Page” to “RSLogix 5000”, the values
stored by the “Backup” function will be copied to the configuration
in the PLC. The “Backup/Restore” will no longer be displayed.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 81

Chapter 3 Product Commissioning

HOA Keypad Option

ArmorStart LT units are available with or without an HOA Keypad. The user
will specify either “Installed” or “Not Installed”. When a unit is provided without
the HOA keypad this setting should be set to “Not Installed” which removes the
keypad parameters.

Source Brake, Electro-Mechanical Brake Option

ArmorStart LT units are available with or without an electromechanical (EM)
brake. The user will select either “Installed” or “Not Installed”. When a unit is
provided without an EM brake the setting should be set to Not Installed which
removes the associated parameters.

User Configurable I/O

The ArmorStart LT I/O points may be used as either an input or an output.

The ArmorStart LT hardware does not require the user to specify a point’s actual
use as an input or output, but the AOP requires the user to specify it to assign
the correct tag name for the I/O point. When a point is configured as an input
or output the corresponding tag name is “Pt0_Data”. If a point is configured
as an output the corresponding feedback tag name is “Pt0_ReadBack”.

Using the navigation tree on the left, start configuring the ArmorStart LT with
the simplified wizard. The minimum configuration is displayed on each page.
Review each field to determine if the default setting is acceptable or modify
as appropriate for your application. Note that more advanced properties are
available using the “Advance” buttons on the screen.

82 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Commissioning Chapter 3

Once complete the new ArmorStart LT will appear in the Ethernet tree. If there
are multiple ArmorStart LTs with similar configurations, utilize the copy-paste
function and update only those parameters that change between units.

The final step is to download your project to the controller and the ArmorStart
LT. Define the path to the PLC and then download.

RSLogix 5000 Add-On Profile The Add-On Profile (AOP) for ArmorStart LT consists of several standard pages
and multiple product specific pages for configuration within RS Logix 5000.
In addition the AOP will automatically create descriptive tag names for the input
and output assemblies.

The following table lists the available AOPs for ArmorStart LT when adding a
new module in RS Logix 5000.
Catalog Number AOP Description
290E-FAZ ArmorStart LT DOL, 0.24…3.5 A, 24V DC
290E-FBZ ArmorStart LT DOL, 1.1…7.6 A, 24V DC
291E-FAZ ArmorStart LT Reverser, 0.24…3.5 A, 24V DC
291E-FBZ ArmorStart LT Reverser, 1.1…7.6 A, 24V DC
294E-FVD1P5Z ArmorStart LT VFD, 480V AC, 0.5 Hp
294E-FVD2P5Z ArmorStart LT VFD, 480V AC, 1 Hp
294E-FVD4P2Z ArmorStart LT VFD, 480V AC, 2 Hp
290E-FAP ArmorStart LT DOL, 0.24…3.5 A, IPS
290E-FBP ArmorStart LT DOL, 1.1…7.6 A, IPS
291E-FAP ArmorStart LT Reverser, 0.24…3.5 A, IPS
291E-FBP ArmorStart LT Reverser, 1.1…7.6 A, IPS

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 83

Chapter 3 Product Commissioning

Catalog Number AOP Description

294E-FVD1P5P ArmorStart LT VFD, 480V AC, 0.5 Hp, IPS
294E-FVD2P5P ArmorStart LT VFD, 480V AC, 1 Hp, IPS
294E-FVD4P2P ArmorStart LT VFD, 480V AC, 2 Hp, IPS

The AOP presents an organized view of parameters within groups and specific
functional pages. All of the parameters are distributed within the AOP pages.
Each page includes basic information that must be reviewed by the user.
In addition, within each page there are capabilities that can be accessed
using the advance buttons.

The AOP page below is an example of the “Advanced” button that provides the
user additional functionality.

84 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Commissioning Chapter 3

Auto-Generated Tags

After you install and configure the AOP, the controller tags are generated. The
tag names are descriptive and automatically generated. This greatly simplifies
programming. The figure below shows an example of the auto-generated tags
for ArmorStart LT.

The following tables provide more clarification regarding the Produce and
Consume assemblies and how they correlate with the auto-generated names.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 85

Chapter 3 Product Commissioning

Table 10 - Default Consume Assembly for Bulletin 294E

Instance 154 “Drive Cmd” – Default Consumed Assembly for Bulletin 294 Starters
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 JogReverse JogForward ResetFault RunReverse RunForward
1 Decel2 Accel2 Out05 Out04 Out03 Out02 Out01 Out00
2 CommandFreq (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
3 CommandFreq (High) (xxx.x Hz)
4 Pt07DeviceIn Pt06DeviceIn Pt05DeviceIn Pt04DeviceIn Pt03DeviceIn Pt02DeviceIn Pt01DeviceIn Pt00DeviceIn
5 Pt15DeviceIn Pt14DeviceIn Pt13DeviceIn Pt12DeviceIn Pt11DeviceIn Pt10DeviceIn Pt09DeviceIn Pt08DeviceIn
6 AnalogDeviceIn (low byte)
7 AnalogDeviceIn (high byte)

Table 11 - Bulletin 294E Consume Assembly Command Tags

Device Name Name Logix Tag Name Data Type Style
ASLT_DEMO RunForward ASLT_DEMO:O.RunForward BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO RunReverse ASLT_DEMO:O.RunReverse BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO ResetFault ASLT_DEMO:O.ResetFault BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO JogForward ASLT_DEMO:O.JogForward BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO JogReverse ASLT_DEMO:O.JogReverse BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt00Data ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt00Data BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt01Data ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt01Data BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt02Data ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt02Data BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt03Data ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt03Data BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt04Data ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt04Data BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt05Data ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt05Data BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Accel2 ASLT_DEMO:O.Accel2 BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Decel2 ASLT_DEMO:O.Decel2 BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO FreqCommand ASLT_DEMO:O.FreqCommand INT Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt00DeviceIn ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt00DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt01DeviceIn ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt01DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt02DeviceIn ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt02DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt03DeviceIn ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt03DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt04DeviceIn ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt04DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt05DeviceIn ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt05DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt06DeviceIn ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt06DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt07DeviceIn ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt07DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt08DeviceIn ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt08DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt09DeviceIn ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt09DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt10DeviceIn ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt10DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt11DeviceIn ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt11DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt12DeviceIn ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt12DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt13DeviceIn ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt13DeviceIn BOOL Decimal

86 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Commissioning Chapter 3

Device Name Name Logix Tag Name Data Type Style

ASLT_DEMO Pt14DeviceIn ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt14DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt15DeviceIn ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt15DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Int00DeviceIn ASLT_DEMO:O.Int00DeviceIn BOOL Decimal

Table 12 - Default Produce Assembly for Bulletin 294E

Instance 156 “Drive Status” - Produced Assembly for Bulletin 294 Starters
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 Reserved - (name):I.ConnectionFault ➊
1 Reserved - (name):I.ConnectionFault ➊
2 Reserved - (name):I.ConnectionFault ➊
3 Reserved - (name):I.ConnectionFault ➊
4 AtReference NetRefStatus NetControlStatus Ready RunningReverse RunningForward WarningPresent TripPresent
5 BrakeStatus DisconnectClosed KeyPadJogging KeyPadHand KeyPadOff KeyPadAuto DLXEnabled
6 OutputFrequency (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
7 OutputFrequency (High) (xxx.x Hz)
8 Pt05 Pt04 Pt03 Pt02 Pt01 Pt00
9
10 Pt07DeviceOut Pt06DeviceOut Pt05DeviceOut Pt04DeviceOut Pt03DeviceOut Pt02DeviceOut Pt01DeviceOut Pt00DeviceOut
11 Pt15DeviceOut Pt14DeviceOut Pt13DeviceOut Pt12DeviceOut Pt11DeviceOut Pt10DeviceOut Pt09DeviceOut Pt08DeviceOut
12 AnalogDeviceOut (low byte)
13 AnalogDeviceOut (high byte)
14
Param3 — OutputCurrent
15
16
Param 4 — OutputVoltage
17
18
Param 5 — DCBusVoltage
19
20
Param 11 — SwitchedVolts (OutputSourceV, IPS units)
21
22
Param 12 — UnswitchedVolts (SensorSourceV, IPS units)
23
24
Param 13 — InternalFanRPM
25
26
Param 14 — ElapesedRunTime
27
28
Param 15 — DriveTemperature
29
30
Param 16 — TripStatus
31
32
Param 17 — WarningStatus
33
➊ PLC Communication Fault Only

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 87

Chapter 3 Product Commissioning

Table 13 - Bulletin 294E Produced Assembly Status Tags

Device Name Name Logix Tag Name Data Type Style
ASLT_DEMO Fault ASLT_DEMO:I.Fault DINT Binary
ASLT_DEMO TripPresent ASLT_DEMO:I.TripPresent BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO WarningPresent ASLT_DEMO:I.WarningPresent BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO RunningForward ASLT_DEMO:I.RunningForward BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO RunningReverse ASLT_DEMO:I.RunningReverse BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Ready ASLT_DEMO:I.Ready BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO NetworkControlStatus ASLT_DEMO:I.NetworkControlStatus BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO NetworkReferenceStatus ASLT_DEMO:I.NetworkReferenceStatus BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO AtReference ASLT_DEMO:I.AtReference BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO DeviceLogixEnabled ASLT_DEMO:I.DeviceLogixEnabled BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO KeypadAuto ASLT_DEMO:I.KeypadAuto BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO KeypadOff ASLT_DEMO:I.KeypadOff BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO KeypadHand ASLT_DEMO:I.KeypadHand BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO KeypadJogging ASLT_DEMO:I.KeypadJogging BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO DisconnectClosed ASLT_DEMO:I.DisconnectClosed BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO BrakeContactorStatus ASLT_DEMO:I.BrakeContactorStatus BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO OutputFrequency ASLT_DEMO:I.OutputFrequency INT Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt00Data ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt00Data BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt01Data ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt01Data BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt02Data ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt02Data BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt03Data ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt03Data BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt04Data ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt04Data BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt05Data ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt05Data BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt00DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt00DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt01DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt01DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt02DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt02DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt03DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt03DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt04DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt04DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt05DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt05DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt06DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt06DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt07DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt07DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt08DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt08DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt09DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt09DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt10DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt10DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt11DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt11DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt12DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt12DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt13DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt13DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt14DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt14DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Pt15DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt15DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
ASLT_DEMO Int00DeviceOut ASLT_DEMO:I.Int00DeviceOut INT Decimal
ASLT_DEMO OutputCurrent ASLT_DEMO:I.OutputCurrent INT Decimal
ASLT_DEMO OutputVoltage ASLT_DEMO:I.OutputVoltage INT Decimal

88 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Commissioning Chapter 3

Device Name Name Logix Tag Name Data Type Style

ASLT_DEMO DCBusVoltage ASLT_DEMO:I.DCBusVoltage INT Decimal
ASLT_DEMO SwitchedVoltageLevel ASLT_DEMO:I.SwitchedVoltageLevel INT Decimal
ASLT_DEMO UnswitchedVoltageLevel ASLT_DEMO:I.UnswitchedVoltageLevel INT Decimal
ASLT_DEMO InternalFanRPM ASLT_DEMO:I.InternalFanRPM INT Decimal
ASLT_DEMO OperatingHours ASLT_DEMO:I.OperatingHours INT Decimal
ASLT_DEMO DriveTemperature ASLT_DEMO:I.DriveTemperature INT Decimal
ASLT_DEMO TripStatus ASLT_DEMO:I.TripStatus INT Binary
ASLT_DEMO WarningStatus ASLT_DEMO:I.WarningStatus INT Binary

Table 14 - Bulletin 294E Consume Assembly/Command Tag Explanation

Device Output Command Tags Tag Description/Use
RunForward Command VFD forward
RunReverse Command VFD reverse
ResetFault Fault reset
JogForward Command Jog forward per internal frequency
JogReverse Command Jog reverse per internal frequency
Pt00Data If user defined as output, commnd output ON
Pt01Data If user defined as output, commnd output ON
Pt02Data If user defined as output, commnd output ON
Pt03Data If user defined as output, commnd output ON
Pt04Data If user defined as output, commnd output ON
Pt05Data If user defined as output, commnd output ON
Accel2 VFD acceleration ramp 2
Decel2 VFD deceleration ramp 2
FreqCommand Logix command frequency
Pt00DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt01DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt02DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt03DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt04DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt05DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt06DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt07DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt08DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt09DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt10DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt11DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt12DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt13DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt14DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt15DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Int00DeviceIn Network analog input to DeviceLogix engine

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 89

Chapter 3 Product Commissioning

Table 15 - Bulletin 294E Produced Assembly/Status Tag Explanation

Device Input Status Tags Tag Description/Use
Fault Communication fault between PLC and device (all 1s = fault, all 0s = normal)
TripPresent Fault exists within unit
WarningPresent Warning of potential fault
RunningForward Motor commanded to run forward
RunningReverse Motor commanded to run reverse
Ready Control and 3-phase power present
NetworkControlStatus Start and Stop command comes from network (PLC or Connected Explicit Messaging)
NetworkReferenceStatus Speed reference comes from the network (not DeviceLogix)
AtReference At commanded speed reference
DeviceLogixEnabled DeviceLogix is enabled
KeypadAuto HOA is in Auto mode
KeypadOff HOA is in Off mode
KeypadHand HOA is in Hand mode
KeypadJogging HOA is in Jog mode
DisconnectClosed Disconnect is closed
BrakeContactorStatus Source brake contactor status (1 = close, 0 = open)
OutputFrequency VFD frequency
Pt00Data User-configured I/O status
Pt01Data User-configured I/O status
Pt02Data User-configured I/O status
Pt03Data User-configured I/O status
Pt04Data ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt04Data
Pt05Data User-configured I/O status
Pt00DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt01DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt02DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt03DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt04DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt05DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt06DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt07DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt08DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt09DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt10DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt11DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt12DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt13DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt14DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt15DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Int00DeviceOut DeviceLogix network analog output
OutputCurrent VFD output current — Parameter 3
OutputVoltage VFD output voltage — Parameter 4

90 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Commissioning Chapter 3

Device Input Status Tags Tag Description/Use

DCBusVoltage VFD DC bus voltage — Parameter 5
SwitchedVoltageLevel Switched control power voltage — Parameter 11
UnswitchedVoltageLevel Unswitched control power voltage — Parameter 12
InternalFanRPM VFD fan speed — Parameter 13
OperatingHours Elapse run hours — Parameter 14
DriveTemperature VFD internal temperature — Parameter 15
TripStatus Bit enumerate trip status — Parameter 16
WarningStatus Bit enumerate warning status — Parameter 17

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 91

Chapter 3 Product Commissioning

Table 16 - Default Consume Assembly for Bulletin 290E/291E

Instance 150 “Starter Cmd” - DeviceLogix Consumed Assembly for Bulletin 290 / 291 Starters
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 ResetFault RunReverse RunForward
1 Out05 Out04 Out03 Out02 Out01 Out00
2 Pt07DeviceIn Pt06DeviceIn Pt05DeviceIn Pt04DeviceIn Pt03DeviceIn Pt02DeviceIn Pt01DeviceIn Pt00DeviceIn
3 Pt15DeviceIn Pt14DeviceIn Pt13DeviceIn Pt12DeviceIn Pt11DeviceIn Pt10DeviceIn Pt09DeviceIn Pt08DeviceIn
4 AnalogDeviceIn (low byte)
5 AnalogDeviceIn (high byte)

Table 17 - Bulletin 290E/291E Consume Assembly Command Tags

Device Name Name Logix Tag Name Data Type Style
DEMO_REV RunForward DEMO_REV:O.RunForward BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV RunReverse DEMO_REV:O.RunReverse BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV ResetFault DEMO_REV:O.ResetFault BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt00Data DEMO_REV:O.Pt00Data BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt01Data DEMO_REV:O.Pt01Data BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt02Data DEMO_REV:O.Pt02Data BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt03Data DEMO_REV:O.Pt03Data BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt04Data DEMO_REV:O.Pt04Data BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt05Data DEMO_REV:O.Pt05Data BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt00DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt00DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt01DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt01DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt02DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt02DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt03DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt03DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt04DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt04DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt05DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt05DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt06DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt06DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt07DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt07DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt08DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt08DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt09DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt09DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt10DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt10DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt11DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt11DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt12DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt12DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt13DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt13DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt14DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt14DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt15DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Pt15DeviceIn BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Int00DeviceIn DEMO_REV:O.Int00DeviceIn INT Decimal

92 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Commissioning Chapter 3

Table 18 - Bulletin 290E/291E Starters Starter Stat Produced Assembly

Instance 152 “Starter Stat” - Produced Assembly for Bulletin 290E / 291E Starters
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 Reserved - (name):I.ConnectionFault ➊
1 Reserved - (name):I.ConnectionFault ➊
2 Reserved - (name):I.ConnectionFault ➊
3 Reserved - (name):I.ConnectionFault ➊
4 CurrentFlowing NetControlStatus Ready RunningReverse RunningForward WarningPresent TripPresent
5 DisconnectClosed KeyPadHand KeyPadOff KeyPadAuto DLXEnabled
6 Pt05 Pt04 Pt03 Pt02 Pt01 Pt00
7
8 Pt07DeviceOut Pt06DeviceOut Pt05DeviceOut Pt04DeviceOut Pt03DeviceOut Pt02DeviceOut Pt01DeviceOut Pt00DeviceOut
9 Pt15DeviceOut Pt14DeviceOut Pt13DeviceOut Pt12DeviceOut Pt11DeviceOut Pt10DeviceOut Pt09DeviceOut Pt08DeviceOut
10 AnalogDeviceOut (low byte)
11 AnalogDeviceOut (high byte)
12
Param 1— PhaseL1Current
13
14
Param 2— PhaseL2Current
15
16
Param 3— PhaseL3Current
17
18
Param 4— AverageCurrent
19
20
Param 5—%ThermalUtilized
21
22
Param 11 — SwitchedVolts (OutputSourceV, IPS units)
23
24
Param 12 — UnswitchedVolts (SensorSourceV, IPS units)
25
26
Param 16 — TripStatus
27
28
Param 17 — WarningStatus
29
➊ PLC Communication Fault Only

Table 19 - Bulletin 290E/291E Produced Assembly Status Tags

Device Name Name Logix Tag Name Data Type Style
DEMO_REV Fault DEMO_REV:I.Fault DINT Binary
DEMO_REV TripPresent DEMO_REV:I.TripPresent BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV WarningPresent DEMO_REV:I.WarningPresent BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV RunningForward DEMO_REV:I.RunningForward BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV RunningReverse DEMO_REV:I.RunningReverse BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Ready DEMO_REV:I.Ready BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV CurrentFlowing DEMO_REV:I.CurrentFlowing BOOL Decimal

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 93

Chapter 3 Product Commissioning

Device Name Name Logix Tag Name Data Type Style

DEMO_REV DeviceLogixEnabled DEMO_REV:I.DeviceLogixEnabled BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV KeypadAuto DEMO_REV:I.KeypadAuto BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV KeypadOff DEMO_REV:I.KeypadOff BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV KeypadHand DEMO_REV:I.KeypadHand BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV DisconnectClosed DEMO_REV:I.DisconnectClosed BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt00Data DEMO_REV:I.Pt00Data BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt01Data DEMO_REV:I.Pt01Data BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt02Data DEMO_REV:I.Pt02Data BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt03Data DEMO_REV:I.Pt03Data BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt04Data DEMO_REV:I.Pt04Data BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt05Data DEMO_REV:I.Pt05Data BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt00DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt00DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt01DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt01DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt02DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt02DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt03DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt03DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt04DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt04DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt05DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt05DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt06DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt06DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt07DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt07DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt08DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt08DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt09DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt09DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt10DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt10DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt11DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt11DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt12DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt12DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt13DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt13DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt14DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt14DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Pt15DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Pt15DeviceOut BOOL Decimal
DEMO_REV Int00DeviceOut DEMO_REV:I.Int00DeviceOut INT Decimal
DEMO_REV L1Current DEMO_REV:I.L1Current INT Decimal
DEMO_REV L2Current DEMO_REV:I.L2Current INT Decimal
DEMO_REV L3Current DEMO_REV:I.L3Current INT Decimal
DEMO_REV AvgCurrent DEMO_REV:I.AvgCurrent INT Decimal
DEMO_REV PercentTCU DEMO_REV:I.PercentTCU INT Decimal
DEMO_REV SwitchedVoltageLevel DEMO_REV:I.SwitchedVoltageLevel INT Decimal
DEMO_REV UnswitchedVoltageLevel DEMO_REV:I.UnswitchedVoltageLevel INT Decimal
DEMO_REV TripStatus DEMO_REV:I.TripStatus INT Binary
DEMO_REV WarningStatus DEMO_REV:I.WarningStatus INT Binary

94 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Commissioning Chapter 3

The following table provides a brief explanation for the tag function:

Table 20 - Bulletin 290E/291E Consume Assembly Command Tag Explanation

Device Output Command Tags Tag Description/Use
RunForward Command VFD forward
RunReverse Command VFD reverse
ResetFault Fault reset
Pt00Data If user defined as output, commnd output ON
Pt01Data If user defined as output, commnd output ON
Pt02Data If user defined as output, commnd output ON
Pt03Data If user defined as output, commnd output ON
Pt04Data If user defined as output, commnd output ON
Pt05Data If user defined as output, commnd output ON
Pt00DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt01DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt02DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt03DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt04DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt05DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt06DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt07DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt08DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt09DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt10DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt11DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt12DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt13DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt14DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Pt15DeviceIn Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Int00DeviceIn Network analog input to DeviceLogix engine

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 95

Chapter 3 Product Commissioning

Table 21 - Bulletin 290E/291E Produced Assembly Status Tag Explanation

Device Input Status Tags Tag Description/Use
Fault Communication fault between PLC and device (all 1s = fault, all 0s = normal)
TripPresent Fault exists within unit
WarningPresent Warning of potential fault
RunningForward Motor commanded to run forward
RunningReverse Motor commanded to run reverse
Ready Control and 3-phase power present
CurrentFlowing Current is passing to motor
DeviceLogixEnabled DeviceLogix is enabled
KeypadAuto HOA is in Auto mode
KeypadOff HOA is in Off mode
KeypadHand HOA is in Hand mode
DisconnectClosed Disconnect is closed
Pt00Data User-configured I/O status
Pt01Data User-configured I/O status
Pt02Data User-configured I/O status
Pt03Data User-configured I/O status
Pt04Data ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt04Data
Pt05Data User-configured I/O status
Pt00DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt01DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt02DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt03DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt04DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt05DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt06DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt07DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt08DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt09DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt10DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt11DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt12DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt13DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt14DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Pt15DeviceOut DeviceLogix network output status
Int00DeviceOut DeviceLogix network analog output
L1Current Phase A current
L2Current Phase B current
L3Current Phase C current
AvgCurrent Average phase A, B, and C current
PercentTCU Overload percentage thermal utilization (100% = overload trip)
SwitchedVoltageLevel Switched control power voltage — Parameter 11

96 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Product Commissioning Chapter 3

Device Input Status Tags Tag Description/Use

UnswitchedVoltageLevel Unswitched control power voltage — Parameter 12
TripStatus Bit enumerate trip status — Parameter 16
WarningStatus Bit enumerate warning status — Parameter 17

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 97

Chapter 3 Product Commissioning

Notes:

98 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Chapter 4

Bulletin 290E/291E/294E
Programmable Parameters

Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) When a 3rd party PLC is used, an embedded EDS file can be uploaded directly
from the ArmorStart LT. This allows device configuration through 3rd party
tools. EDS files are also available on the internet at: http://www.ab.com/
networks/eds.

Basic Setup Parameters When the RSLogix AOP is not used, Table 22 lists the minimum setup
configurations required for Bulletin 290E/291E or Bulletin 294E. Basic
parameter configuration, status, and diagnostic information can be accessed
from the embedded web browser.

RSLogix 5000 is the recommended commissioning software. Download the Add-

On-Profile (AOP) from http://support.rockwellautomation.com/controlflash/Logix
Profiler.asp for additional functionality. There are additional capabilities that are
not enabled or left at their default values.

Table 22 - Quick Parameter Setup

Bulletin 290E/291E Bulletin 294E
28 FLASetting 28 MotorNPVolts
29 OLResetLevel 29 MotorNPHertz
30 OverloadClass 30 MotorOLCurrent
49 IOPointConfiguration 32 StopMode
34 MinimumFreq
35 MaximumFreq
36 AccelTime1
37 DecelTime1
49 IOPointConfiguration➊

➊ When using the AOP this parameter is configured during module definition on the “General” page.

IMPORTANT All I/O points are configured as inputs, by default. Identify which points
are outputs, when needed for proper operation, using parameter 49
[IOPointConfiguration].

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 99

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

Parameter Groups
Bulletin Common to Bulletin 290E/291E Bulletin
Bulletin 294E Units
290E/291E Units and Bulletin 294E Units 290E/291E Units
Basic Status Trip Status Basic Config
1 PhaseL1Current 1 OutputFreq 16 TripStatus 20 TripLog2 28 FLASetting
2 PhaseL2Current 2 CommandFreq 17 WarningStatus 21 TripLog3 29 OLResetLevel
3 PhaseL3Current 3 OutputCurrent 18 TripLog0 22 TripLog4 30 OverloadClass
4 AverageCurrent 4 OutputVoltage 19 TripLog1 31…40 Reserved
5%ThermalUtilized 5 DCBusVoltage
Bulletin
6 StarterStatus 6 StarterStatus Bulletin 294E Units
7 StarterCommand 7 StarterCommand 290E/291E Units
8 AuxIOStatus 8 AuxIOStatus Trip Status
9 NetworkStatus 9 NetworkStatus
10 DLXControlStatus 10 DLXControlStatus 23 SnapShotL1Amps 23 SnapShotOutFreq
11 OutputSourceV 11 OutputSourceV 24 SnapShotL2Amps 24 SnapShotOutAmps
12 SensorSourceV 12 SensorSourceV 25 SnapShotL3Amps 25 SnapShotOutVolts
13 Reserved 13 InternalFanRPM 26 SnapShotAvgAmps 26 SnapShotBusVolts
14 Reserved 14 ElapsedRunTime 27 SnapShot%Thermal 27 SnapShotDrvTemp
15 Reserved 15 DriveTemperature

100 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

Common to Bulletin 290E/291E

Bulletin 294E Units
and Bulletin 294E Units
Motor and Control Speed Control Starter Protection User I/O Config. Miscellaneous Config.
28 MotorNPVolts 33 SpeedReference 41 ProtFltResetMode 49 IOPointConfigure 64 NetworkOverride
29 MotorNPHertz 34 MinimumFreq 42 ProtectFltEnable 50 FilterOffOn 65 CommsOverride
30 MotorOLCurrent 35 MaximumFreq 43 WarningEnable 51 FilterOnOff 66 KeypadMode
31 CurrentLimit 36 AccelTime1 44 ProtectFltReset 52 OutProtFltState 67 KeypadDisable
32 StopMode 37 DecelTime1 45 RunNetFltAction 53 OutProtFltValue 68 SetToDefaults
38 SCurvePercent 46 RunNetFaultValue 54 OutNetFaultState
39 JogFrequency 47 RunNetIdleAction 55 OutNetFaultValue
40 JogAccelDecel 48 RunNetIdleValue 56 OutNetIdleState
57 OutNetIdleValue
58 Input00Function
59 Input01Function
60 Input02Function
61 Input03Function
62 Input04Function
63 Input05Function
Bulletin
Bulletin 294E Units
290E/291E Units
Advanced Config.
69 OLWarningLevel 69 AccelTime2
70 JamInhibitTime 70 DecelTime2
71 JamTripDelay 71 MotorOLRetention
72 JamTripLevel 72 InternalFreq
73 JamWarningLevel 73 SkipFrequency
74 StallEnabledTime 74 SkipFreqBand
75 StallTripLevel 75 DCBrakeTime
76 ULInhibitTime 76 DCBrakeLevel
77 ULTripDelay 77 ReverseDisable
78 ULTripLevel 78 FlyingStartEna
79 ULWarningLevel 79 Compensation
80 SlipHertzAtFLA
81 BusRegulateMode
82 MotorOLSelect
83 SWCurrentTrip
84 AutoRestartTries
85 AutoRestartDelay
86 BoostSelect
87 MaximumVoltage
88 MotorNamPlateFLA
89 BrakeMode
90 BrakeFreqThresh
91 BrakeCurrThresh

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 101

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP Introduction

Parameters
This chapter describes each programmable parameter and its function.

Parameter Programming
Each Distributed Motor Controller type will have a common set of parameters
and a set of parameters that pertain to the individual starter type. Parameters
41…68 are common to all ArmorStart LTs.

IMPORTANT Parameter setting changes take effect immediately unless otherwise noted
in the parameter listing. These changes maybe immediate even during the
"running" status.

Bulletin 290E/291E Basic Status Group

PhaseL1Current Parameter Number 1
Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the actual
Phase L1 current. Data Type INT
Group Basic Status
Units x.xx Amps
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 32767
Default Value 0

PhaseL2Current Parameter Number 2

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the actual
Phase L2 current. Data Type INT
Group Basic Status
Units x.xx Amps
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 32767
Default Value 0

102 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

PhaseL3Current Parameter Number 3

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the actual
Phase L3 current. Data Type INT
Group Basic Status
Units x.xx Amps
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 32767
Default Value 0

AverageCurrent Parameter Number 4

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the average of
3 Phase currents. Data Type INT
Group Basic Status
Units x.xx Amps
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 32767
Default Value 0

%ThermalUtilized Parameter Number 5

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the percent of
Thermal Capacity used. Data Type USINT
Group Basic Status
Units Percent
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 100
Default Value 0

StarterStatus Parameter Number 6

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the status of the
starter. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 0x4FBF
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 103

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X TripPresent
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — WarningPresent
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — RunningForward
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — RunningReverse
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Ready
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — NetControlStatus
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — CurrentFlowing
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — DLXEnabled
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — KeyPadAuto
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — KeyPadOff
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — KeyPadHand
— — X X — — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — DisconnectClosed
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved

StarterCommand Parameter Number 7

Access Rule GET
The parameter provides the Run Command
status to the starter. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 0x3F07
Default Value 0

104 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X RunForward
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — RunReverse
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — ResetFault
— — — — — — — — X X X X X — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — Out00
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — Out01
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — Out02
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — Out03
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — Out04
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — Out05
X X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved

AuxIOStatus Parameter Number 8

Access Rule GET
The parameter provides the status of
hardware input/output points. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 0x3F
Default Value 0

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X Pt00
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — Pt01
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — Pt02
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Pt03
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Pt04
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — Pt05
X X X X X X X X X X — — — — — — Reserved

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 105

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

NetworkStatus Parameter Number 9

Access Rule GET
The parameter provides the status of the
network connections. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 0xDF
Default Value 0

Bit
Function:
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X ExplicitCnxn
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — I/OConnection
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — ExplicitCnxnFlt
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — IOCnxnFault
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — IOCnxnIdle
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — Reserve
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — DLREnabled
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — DLRFault
X X X X X X X X — — — — — — — — Reserved

DLXControlStatus Parameter Number 10

Access Rule GET
The parameter provides the DeviceLogix
Control Status. Data Type UINT
Group Basic Status
0 = Controlled in Logix programs.
1 = Controlled in local DLX programs. Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value OXFF
Default Value 0

Bit
Function:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — X RunForward
— — — — — — X — RunReverse
— — — — — X — — Out00
— — — — X — — — Out01
— — — X — — — — Out02
— — X — — — — — Out03
— X — — — — — — Out04
X — — — — — — — Out05

106 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

OutputSourceV (IPS) Parameter Number 11

[SwitchedVolts]
Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the incoming Data Type UINT
switched control voltage across terminals
A1…A2. Group Basic Status
(IPS) Available voltage on User Output Pin Units x.xx Volts
4 for all I/O points
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 0

SensorSourceV (IPS) Parameter Number 12

[UnswitchedVolts]
Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the incoming Data Type UINT
unswitched control voltage across
terminals A2…A3. Group Basic Status
(IPS) Available voltage on Input Sensor Units x.xx Volts
Source Pin 1 for all I/O points
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 0

Trip Status Group

TripStatus Parameter Number 16
Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the fault
condition that caused any current trip. Data Type WORD
Group Trip Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 0xE3BF
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 107

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X OverloadTrip
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — PhaseLossTrip
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — UnderPowerTrip
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — SensorShortTrip
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — PhaseImbalanceTrip
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — NonVolMemoryTrip
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — JamTrip
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — StallTrip
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — UnderloadTrip
— — — X X X — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — OutputShortTrip
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — UserDefinedTrip
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — HardwareFltTrip

WarningStatus Parameter Number 17

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the current
warning condition. Data Type WORD
Group Trip Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 0xC295
Default Value

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X OverloadWarning
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — UnderPowerWarn
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — PhaseImbalanceWarn
— — — — — — — — — X X — — — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — JamWarning
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — Reserved
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — UnderloadWarning
— — X X X X — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — UnswitchedPwrWarn
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — ConfigWarning

108 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

TripLog1 Parameter Number 18

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the last trip to
occur. Data Type UINT
Group Trip Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 75
Default Value 0

TripLog2 Parameter Number 19

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the second last
trip to occur. Data Type UINT
Group Trip Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 75
Default Value 0

TripLog3 Parameter Number 20

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the third last trip
to occur. Data Type UINT
Group Trip Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 75
Default Value 0

TripLog4 Parameter Number 21

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the fourth last trip
to occur. Data Type UINT
Group Trip Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 75
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 109

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

TripLog5 Parameter Number 22

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the fifth last trip
to occur. Data Type UINT
Group Trip Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 75
Default Value 0

SnapShotL1Amps Parameter Number 23

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides a snapshot of
actual Phase L1 current at time of last trip. Data Type INT
Group Trip Status
Units x.xx Amps
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 32767
Default Value

SnapShotL2Amps Parameter Number 24

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides a snapshot of
actual Phase L2 current at time of last trip. Data Type INT
Group Trip Status
Units x.xx Amps
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 32767
Default Value 0

SnapShotL3Amps Parameter Number 25

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides a snapshot of
actual Phase L3 current at time of last trip. Data Type INT
Group Trip Status
Units x.xx Amps
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 32767
Default Value 0

110 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

SnapShotLAvgAmps Parameter Number 26

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides a snapshot of
average of 3 Phase currents at time Data Type INT
of last trip.
Group Trip Status
Units x.xx Amps
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 32767
Default Value 0

SnapShot%Thermal Parameter Number 27

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides a snapshot of the
percentage of Thermal Capacity used at Data Type USINT
time of last trip.
Group Trip Status
Units Percent
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 100
Default Value 0

Basic Configuration Group

FLASetting Parameter Number 28
Access Rule GET/SET
The motor’s full load current rating is
programmed in this parameter. Data Type INT
Group Basic Configuration
Units x.xx Amps
Minimum Value See Table 23.
Maximum Value See Table 23.
Default Value See Table 23.

Table 23 - FLA Setting Ranges and Default Values (with indicated setting precision)
FLA Current Range (A)
Default Value
CatNo 460V AC Minimum Value Maximum Value
290E/1_-FA_* 3 Hp 0.24 3.5 0.24
290E/1_-FB_* 5 Hp 1.1 7.6 1.1

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 111

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

OLResetLevel Parameter Number 29

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter determines the % Thermal
Capacity which an overload can be cleared. Data Type BYTE
Group Basic Configuration
Units % TCU
Minimum Value 75
Maximum Value 100
Default Value 75

OverloadClass Parameter Number 30

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the overload trip
classification. Data Type USINT
1 = 10
Group Basic Configuration
2 = 15
3 = 20 Units —
Minimum Value 1
Maximum Value 3
Default Value 1

Starter Protection Group

ProtFltResetMode Parameter Number 41
Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter configures the Protection
Fault reset mode. Data Type BOOL
0 = Manual
Group Starter Protection
1 = Automatic
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

TripStatus Parameter Number 42

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the fault
condition that caused any current trip. Data Type WORD
Group Trip Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 0xE3BF
Default Value 0

112 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X OverloadTrip
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — PhaseLossTrip
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — UnderPowerTrip
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — SensorShortTrip
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — PhaseImbalanceTrip
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — NonVolMemoryTrip
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — JamTrip
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — StallTrip
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — UnderloadTrip
— — — X X X — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — OutputShortTrip
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — UserDefinedTrip
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — HardwareFltTrip
The highlighted functions are enabled by default.

WarningStatus Parameter Number 43

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the current
warning condition. Data Type WORD
Group Trip Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 0xC295
Default Value

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 113

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X OverloadWarning
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — UnderPowerWarn
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — PhasImbalanceWarn
— — — — — — — — — X X — — — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — JamWarning
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — Reserved
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — UnderloadWarning
— — X X X X — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — UnswitchedPwrWarn
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — ConfigWarning

ProtectFltReset Parameter Number 44

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter resets a Protection Fault by
setting the bit to 1. Data Type BOOL
0 = NoAction
Group Starter Protection
0 > 1 = ResetFault
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

RunNetFltAction Parameter Number 45

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 46 (RunNetFltValue) defines Data Type BOOL
how the starter will respond when
a fault occurs. Group Starter Protection
0 = GoToFaultValue Units —
1 = HoldLastState
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

114 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

RunNetFltValue Parameter Number 46

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter determines how the starter
will be commanded in the event of a fault. Data Type BOOL
State the starter will go to on a NetFlt if
Parameter 45 (RunNetFltAction) = 1 Group Starter Protection
(GotoFault-Value).
Units —
0 = OFF
1 = ON Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

RunNetIdlAction Parameter Number 47

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 48 (RunNetIdlValue) defines Data Type BOOL
how the starter will respond when a
network is idle as determined by Group Starter Protection
Parameter 48.
Units —
0 = GoToIdleValue
1 = HoldLastState Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

RunNetIdlValue Parameter Number 48

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the state that
starter assumes when the network is idle Data Type BOOL
and Parameter 47 (RunNetIdlAction) is set
to 1. Group Starter Protection
0 = OFF Units —
1 = ON
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

User I/O Configuration Group

IOPointConfigure Parameter Number 49
Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter determines the point that
is configured: Data Type WORD
0 = Input
Group User I/O Config.
1 = Output
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 0x3F
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 115

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

Bit
Function
5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — X Pt00
— — — — X — Pt01
— — — X — — Pt02
— — X — — — Pt03
— X — — — — Pt04
X — — — — — Pt05

FilterOffOn Parameter Number 50

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter determines the input
(which must be present for this time) Data Type USINT
before being reported ON.
Group User I/O Config.
Units msecs
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 64
Default Value 0

FilterOnOff Parameter Number 51

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter determines the input
(which must be absent for this time) Data Type USINT
before being reported OFF.
Group User I/O Config.
Units msecs
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 64
Default Value 0

OutProtFltState Parameter Number 52

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 53 (OutProtFltValue) defines Data Type BOOL
how the starter outputs will respond when
a fault occurs. Group User I/O Config.
0 = GoToPrFltValue Units —
1 = IgnorePrFlt
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

116 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

OutProtFltValue Parameter Number 53

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter determines how the starter
outputs will be commanded in the event Data Type BOOL
of a protection fault if Parameter 52
(OutProtFltState) = 0. Group User I/O Config.
0 = OFF Units —
1 = ON
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutNetFaultState Parameter Number 54

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 55 (OutNetFaultValue) defines Data Type BOOL
how the starter outputs will respond on an
Ethernet fault. Group User I/O Config.
0 = GoToFaultValue Units —
1 = HoldLastState
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutNetFaultValue Parameter Number 55

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the state of the
starter outputs when an Ethernet fault Data Type BOOL
occurs and Parameter 54
(OutNetFaultState) is set to 0. Group User I/O Config.
0 = OFF Units —
1 = ON
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutNetIdleState Parameter Number 56

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 57 (OutNetIdleValue) defines Data Type BOOL
how the starter outputs will respond when
a network is idle. Group User I/O Config.
0 = GoToIdleValue Units —
1 = HoldLastState
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 117

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

OutNetIdleValue Parameter Number 57

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the state that
starter outputs assumes when the Data Type BOOL
network is idle and Parameter 56
(OutNetIdleState) is set to 0. Group User I/O Config.
0 = OFF Units —
1 = ON
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Input00Function Parameter Number 58

This parameter determines the special Access Rule GET/SET

function for User Input 0:
Data Type USINT
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset Group User I/O Config.
2 = MotionDisable➊
3 = ForceSnapShot Units —
4 = UserFault
Minimum Value 0
5 = BrakeRelease➊
Maximum Value 4
➊ These choices are level sensitive. All
others are edge sensitive Default Value 0

Input01Function Parameter Number 59

This parameter determines the special Access Rule GET/SET

function for User Input 1:
Data Type USINT
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset Group User I/O Config.
2 = MotionDisable➊
3 = ForceSnapShot Units —
4 = UserFault
Minimum Value 0
5 = BrakeRelease➊
Maximum Value 4
➊ These choices are level sensitive. All
others are edge sensitive Default Value 0

Input02Function Parameter Number 60

This parameter determines the special Access Rule GET/SET

function for User Input 2:
Data Type USINT
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset Group User I/O Config.
2 = MotionDisable➊
3 = ForceSnapShot Units —
4 = UserFault
Minimum Value 0
5 = BrakeRelease➊
Maximum Value 4
➊ These choices are level sensitive. All
others are edge sensitive Default Value 0

118 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

Input03Function Parameter Number 61

This parameter determines the special Access Rule GET/SET

function for User Input 3:
Data Type USINT
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset Group User I/O Config.
2 = MotionDisable➊
3 = ForceSnapShot Units —
4 = UserFault
Minimum Value 0
5 = BrakeRelease➊
Maximum Value 4
➊ These choices are level sensitive. All
others are edge sensitive Default Value 0

Input04Function Parameter Number 62

This parameter determines the special Access Rule GET/SET

function for User Input 4:
Data Type USINT
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset Group User I/O Config.
2 = MotionDisable➊
3 = ForceSnapShot Units —
4 = UserFault
Minimum Value 0
5 = BrakeRelease➊
Maximum Value 4
➊ These choices are level sensitive. All
others are edge sensitive Default Value 0

Input05Function Parameter Number 63

This parameter determines the special Access Rule GET/SET

function for User Input 5:
Data Type USINT
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset Group User I/O Config.
2 = MotionDisable➊
3 = ForceSnapShot Units —
4 = UserFault
Minimum Value 0
5 = BrakeRelease➊
Maximum Value 4
➊ These choices are level sensitive. All
others are edge sensitive Default Value 0

Miscellaneous Configuration Group

NetworkOverride Parameter Number 64
Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter allows for the local logic to
override a Network fault. Data Type BOOL
0 = Disable
Group Misc. Config.
1 = Enable
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 119

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

CommsOverride Parameter Number 65

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter allows for local logic to
override an I/O connection timeout. Data Type BOOL
0 = Disable
Group Misc. Config.
1 = Enable
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

KeypadMode Parameter Number 66

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter selects if the keypad
operation is maintained or momentary. Data Type BOOL
0 = Momentary
Group Misc. Config.
1 = Maintained
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

KeypadDisable Parameter Number 67

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter disables all keypad
function except for the “OFF” and “RESET” Data Type BOOL
buttons.
0 = KeypadEnabled Group Misc. Config.
1 = KeypadDisabled Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

SetToDefaults Parameter Number 68

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter if set to “1” will set the
device to the factory defaults. Data Type BOOL
0 = NoAction
Group Misc. Config.
1 = SetToDefaults
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

120 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

Advanced Configuration
OLWarningLevel Parameter Number 69
Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the Overload
Warning Level in % Thermal Capacity Used Data Type USINT
(%TCU).
Group Advanced Config.
Units %TCU
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 100
Default Value 85

JamInhibitTime Parameter Number 70

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the time
during motor starting that Jam detection Data Type USINT
is inhibited.
Group Advanced Config.
Units secs.
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 250
Default Value 10

JamTripDelay Parameter Number 71

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines how much
time above the Jam Level before the unit Data Type USINT
will trip.
Group Advanced Config.
Units x.x secs
Minimum Value 1
Maximum Value 25.0
Default Value 5.0

JamTripLevel Parameter Number 72

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the Jam Trip
Level as a percentage of Full Load Amps. Data Type UINT
Group Advanced Config.
Units %FLA
Minimum Value 50
Maximum Value 600
Default Value 250

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 121

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

JamWarningLevel Parameter Number 73

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the Jam
Warning Level as a percentage Data Type UINT
of Full Load Amps.
Group Advanced Config.
Units %FLA
Minimum Value 50
Maximum Value 600
Default Value 150

StallEnabledTime Parameter Number 74

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the time
that stall detection is enabled during Data Type USINT
motor starting.
Group Advanced Config.
Units secs
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 250
Default Value 10

StallTripLevel Parameter Number 75

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the Stall Trip
Level as a percentage of Full Load Amps. Data Type UINT
Group Advanced Config.
Units %FLA
Minimum Value 100
Maximum Value 600
Default Value 600

ULInhibitTime Parameter Number 76

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the time
during motor starting that Underload Data Type USINT
detection is inhibited.
Group Advanced Config.
Units secs
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 250
Default Value 10

122 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

ULTripDelay Parameter Number 77

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the time below
Underload Level before the unit will trip. Data Type USINT
Group Advanced Config.
Units x.x secs
Minimum Value 1
Maximum Value 25.0
Default Value 5.0

ULTripLevel Parameter Number 78

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the
Underload Trip Level as a percentage Data Type USINT
of Full Load Amps.
Group Advanced Config.
Units %FLA
Minimum Value 10
Maximum Value 100
Default Value 50

ULWarningLevel Parameter Number 79

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the
Underload Warning Level as a Data Type USINT
percentage of Full Load Amps.
Group Advanced Config.
Units %FLA
Minimum Value 10
Maximum Value 100
Default Value 70

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 123

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

Bulletin 294E Basic Status Group

OutputFreq Parameter Number 1
Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the output
frequency at motor terminals T1, T2, T3. Data Type UINT
Group Basic Status
Units x.x Hz
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 999.9
Default Value 0

CommandFreq Parameter Number 2

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the
commanded frequency even Data Type UINT
if the starter is not running.
Group Basic Status
Units x.x Hz
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 999.9
Default Value 0

OutputCurrent Parameter Number 3

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the output
current at motor terminals T1, T2, T3. Data Type UINT
Group Basic Status
Units x.xx Amps
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 8.00
Default Value 0

OutputVoltage Parameter Number 4

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the output
voltage at motor terminals T1, T2, T3. Data Type UINT
Group Basic Status
Units x.xV AC
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 999.9
Default Value 0

124 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

DCBusVoltage Parameter Number 5

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the present DC
bus voltage level. Data Type UINT
Group Basic Status
Units V DC
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1200
Default Value 0

Starter Status Parameter Number 6

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the status
of the starter. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value OxDFFF
Default Value 0

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X TripPresent
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — WarningPresent
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — RunningForward
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — RunningReverse
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Ready
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — NetControlStatus
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — NetRefStatus
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — AtReference
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — DLXEnabled
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — KeyPadAuto
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — KeyPadOff
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — KeyPadHand
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — KeyPadJogging
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — DisconnectClosed
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — BrakeStatus

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 125

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

StarterCommand Parameter Number 7

Access Rule GET
The parameter provides the command
status of the starter. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 0xFF1F
Default Value 0

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X RunningForward
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — RunningReverse
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — ResetFault
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — JogForward
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — JogReverse
— — — — — — — — X X X — — — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — Out00
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — Out01
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — Out02
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — Out03
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — Out04
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — Out05
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Accel2
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Decel2

AuxIOStatus Parameter Number 8

Access Rule GET
Status of the hardware
input/output points. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 0x3F
Default Value 0

126 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

Bit
Function:
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X Pt00
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — Pt01
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — Pt02
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Pt03
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Pt04
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — Pt05
X X X X X X X X X X — — — — — — Reserved

NetworkStatus Parameter Number 9

Access Rule GET
The parameter provides the status
of the network connections. Data Type WORD
Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 0xDF
Default Value 0

Bit
Function:
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X ExplicitCnxn
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — IOConnection
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — ExplicitCnxnFlt
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — IOCnxnFault
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — IOCnxnIdle
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — Reserve
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — DLREnabled
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — DLRFlt
X X X X X X X X — — — — — — — — Reserved

DLXControlStatus Parameter Number 10

Access Rule GET
The parameter provides the DeviceLogix
Control Status. Data Type UINT
0 = Controlled in Logix Programs
Group Basic Status
1 = Controlled in local DLX programs.
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 0x1FFF
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 127

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

Bit
Function:
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X RunForward
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — RunReverse
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — Out00
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Out01
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Out02
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — Out03
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — Out04
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — Out05
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — JogForward
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — JogReverse
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — Accel2
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — Decel2
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — Command Freq
X X X — — — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved

OutputSourceV (IPS) Parameter Number 11

[SwitchedVolts]
Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the incoming Data Type UINT
switched control voltage across terminals
A1…A2. Group Basic Status
(IPS) available voltage on User Output Pin Units x.xx Volts
4 for all I/O points.
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 0

SensorSourceV (IPS) Parameter Number 12

[UnswitchedVolts]
Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the incoming Data Type UINT
unswitched control voltage across
terminals A2…A3. Group Basic Status
(IPS) available voltage on input Sensor Units x.xx Volts
Source Pin 1 for all I/O points.
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 0

128 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

InternalFanRPM Parameter Number 13

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) of the Data Type UINT
internal cooling fan.
Group Basic Status
Units RPM
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 65535
Default Value 0

ElapsedRunTime Parameter Number 14

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the
accumulated run time displayed in 10 hour Data Type UINT
increments.
1 = 10 Hrs Group Basic Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 9999
Default Value 0

DriveTemperature Parameter Number 15

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the
present operating temperature Data Type UINT
of the power section.
Group Basic Status
Units °C
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 9999
Default Value 0

Trip Status Group

TripStatus Parameter Number 16
Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the fault
condition that caused any current trip. Data Type WORD
Group Trip Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 0xFFFF
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 129

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X OverloadTrip
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — PhaseShortTrip
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — UnderPowerTrip
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — SensorShortTrip
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — OverCurrentTrip
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — NonVolMemoryTrip
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — ParamSyncTrip
DCBusTrip/
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — OpenDisconnect
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — StallTrip
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — OverTemperature
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — GroundFault
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — RestartRetries
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — DriveHdwFault
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — OutputShortTrip
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — UserDefinedTrip
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — HardwareFltTrip

WarningStatus Parameter Number 17

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the current
warning condition. Data Type WORD
Group Trip Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 0xC044
Default Value 0

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X X Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — UnderPowerWarn
— — — — — — — — — — X X X — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — DriveParamInit
— — X X X X X X X — — — — — — — Reserved
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — UnswitchedPwrWarn
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — ConfigWarning

130 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

TripLog0 Parameter Number 18

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the last trip
to occur. Data Type UINT
Group Trip Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 75
Default Value 0

TripLog1 Parameter Number 19

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the second last
trip to occur. Data Type UINT
Group Trip Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 75
Default Value 0

TripLog2 Parameter Number 20

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the third last trip
to occur. Data Type UINT
Group Trip Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 75
Default Value 0

TripLog3 Parameter Number 21

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the fourth last trip
to occur. Data Type UINT
Group Trip Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 75
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 131

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

TripLog4 Parameter Number 22

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides the fifth last trip
to occur. Data Type UINT
Group Trip Status
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 75
Default Value 0

SnapShotOutFreq Parameter Number 23

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides a snapshot
of output frequency at time of last trip. Data Type UINT
Group Trip Status
Units x.x Hz
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 999.9
Default Value 0

SnapShotOutAmps Parameter Number 24

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides a snapshot
of output current at time of last trip. Data Type UINT
Group Trip Status
Units x.xx Amps
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 4.60
Default Value 0

SnapShotOutVolts Parameter Number 25

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides a snapshot
of output voltage at time of last trip. Data Type UINT
Group Trip Status
Units x.x V AC
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 999.9
Default Value 0

132 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

SnapShotBusVolts Parameter Number 26

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides a snapshot of DC
bus voltage level at time of last trip. Data Type UINT
Group Trip Status
Units V DC
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1200
Default Value 0

SnapShotDrvTemp Parameter Number 27

Access Rule GET
This parameter provides a snapshot of
operating temperature at time of last trip. Data Type UINT
Group Trip Status
Units °C
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 9999
Default Value 0

Motor and Control Group

MotorNPVolts Parameter Number 28

Access Rule GET/SET
O Stop drive before changing this
parameter. Data Type UINT

Set to the motor nameplate rated voltage. Group Motor and Control
Units V AC
Minimum Value 35
Maximum Value 460
Default Value 460

MotorNPHertz Parameter Number 29

Access Rule GET/SET
O Stop drive before changing this
parameter. Data Type UINT

Set to the motor nameplate rated Group Motor and Control

frequency. Units Hz
Minimum Value 10
Maximum Value 400
Default Value 60

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 133

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

MotorOLCurrent Parameter Number 30

Related Parameter 31, 80, 82…83
Set to the maximum allowable motor current.
Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Motor and Control
Cat. No. Hp (kW) Min Amps Default Amps Units x.x Amps
294_FD1P5 0.5 (0.4) 0 1.5 Minimum Value 0
294_FD2P5 1.0 (0.75) 0 2.5 Maximum Value Cat. No. Dependent
294_FD4P2 2.0 (1.5) 0 3.6 Default Value Cat. No. Max Output

CurrentLimit Parameter Number 31

Related Parameters
Maximum output current allowed before current limiting occurs
Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Motor and Control
Cat. No. Hp (kW) Units x.x Amps
294_FD1P5 0.5 Hp Min = 0; Max = 2.7; Default = 2.2 Minimum Value 0
294_FD2P5 1.0 Hp Min = 0; Max = 4.5; Default = 3.7 Maximum Value Cat. No. Dependent
294_FD4P2 2.0 Hp Min = 0; Max = 7.5; Default = 6.3 Default Value Cat. No. Dependent

StopMode Parameter Number 32

Valid Stop Mode for the Bulletin 294E ArmorStart LT are the following: Related Parameters
0 = RampToStop, “Stop” command clears active fault Access Rule GET/SET
1 = Coast to Stop, “Stop” command clears active fault
2 = DCBrake, DC Injection Braking Stop, “Stop” command clears active fault Data Type UINT
3 = DCBrakeAuto, DC Injection Stop with Auto Shutoff
Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in Parameter 75 (DC Brake Time) Group Motor and Control
or Units —
Drive shuts off if current limit is exceeded.
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 3

Default Value 0

134 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

Speed Control Group

SpeedReference Parameter Number 33
Related Parameters 1, 2, 36, 37, 72
Sets the source of the speed reference:
0 = Logix (Network or DeviceLogix) Access Rule GET/SET
1 = InternalFreq Data Type UINT
Group Speed Control
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 2
Default Value 0

MinimumFreq Parameter Number 34

Related Parameter 1, 2, 35
Sets the lowest frequency the drive will
output continuously. Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Speed Control
Units x.x Hz
Minimum Value 0.0
Maximum Value 400.0
Default Value 0.0

MaximumFreq Parameter Number 35

Related Parameter 1, 2, 34, 35, 139
O Stop drive before changing this
parameter. Access Rule GET/SET

Sets the highest frequency the drive will Data Type UINT
output. Group Speed Control
Units Hz
Minimum Value 0.0
Maximum Value 400
Default Value 60

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 135

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

AccelTime1 Parameter Number 36

Related Parameters 33, 37
Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases.
Maximum Freq- = Accel Rate Access Rule GET/SET
-------------------------------------
Accel Time Data Type UINT
Parameter 35 Group Speed Control
(Maximum Freq)
Units x.x secs

D ec
n
atio

eler
Minimum Value 0.0
eler

Speed

atio
Acc

n
Maximum Value 600.0
0
Accel Time Decel
0 Time 1 Time 1
Default Value 10.0

DecelTime1 Parameter Number 37

Related Parameters 33, 36
Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases.
Maximum Freq- = Decel Rate Access Rule GET/SET
-------------------------------------
Decel Time Data Type UINT
Parameter 35 Group Speed Control
(Maximum Freq)
Units x.x secs
Dec
n
atio

eler

Minimum Value 0.1

eler

Speed
atio
Acc

Maximum Value 600.0

0
Accel Time Decel
0 Time 1 Time 1
Default Value 10.0

SCurvePercent Parameter Number 38

Access Rule GET/SET
Sets the percentage of acceleration or
deceleration time that is applied to ramp Data Type UINT
as S Curve. Time is added, half at the
beginning and half at the end of the ramp. Group Speed Control
Units Percentage
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 100
Default Value 0

136 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

Figure 53 - S Curve

Example: 50% S Curve

Accel Time = 10 Seconds
Target
S Curve Setting = 50%
S Curve Time = 10 x 0.5 = 5 Seconds
Total Time = 10 + 5 = 15 Seconds
Target 2

1/2 S Curve Time Accel Time 1/2 S Curve Time

2.5 Seconds 10 Seconds 2.5 Seconds
Total Time to Accelerate = Accel Time + S Curve Time

JogFrequency Parameter Number 39

Related Parameters 35, 40
Sets the output frequency when the jog
command is issued. Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units x.x Hz
Minimum Value 0.0
Maximum Value 400.0
Default Value 10.0

JogAccelDecel Parameter Number 40

Related Parameters 39
Sets the acceleration and deceleration
time when a jog command is issued. Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Drive Advanced Setup
Units x.x secs
Minimum Value 0.1
Maximum Value 600.0
Default Value 10.0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 137

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

Starter Protection Group

ProtFltResetMode Parameter Number 41
Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter configures the Protection
Fault reset mode. Data Type BOOL
0 = Manual
Group Starter Protection
1 = Automatic
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

ProtectFltEnable Parameter Number 42

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter enables the Protection
Fault by setting the bit to 1. Data Type WORD
Group Starter Protection
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 0xFFFF
Default Value 0xBFFF

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X OverloadTrip
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — PhaseShortTrip
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — UnderPowerTrip
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — SensorShortTrip
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — OverCurrentTrip
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — NonVolMemoryTrip
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — ParamSyncTrip
DCBusTrip/
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — — OpenDisconnect
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — — StallTrip
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — OverTemperature
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — — GroundFault
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — — RestartRetries
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — DriveHdwFault
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — OutputShortTrip
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — UserDefinedTrip
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — HardwareFltTrip

The functions highlighted are enabled by default

138 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

WarningEnable Parameter Number 43

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter enables a warning
by setting the bit to 1. Data Type WORD
Group Starter Protection
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 0xC044
Default Value 0

Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X X Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — UnderPowerWarn
— — — — — — — — — — X X X — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — — DriveParamInit
— — X X X X X X X — — — — — — — Reserved
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — UnswitchedPwrWarn
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — ConfigWarning

ProtectFltReset Parameter Number 44

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter resets a Protection Fault
by setting the bit to 1. Data Type BOOL
0 = NoAction
Group Starter Protection
0 > 1 = ResetFault
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

RunNetFltAction Parameter Number 45

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 46 (RunNetFltValue) defines Data Type BOOL
how the starter will respond when a
network fault occurs as determined. Group Starter Protection
0 = GoToFaultValue Units —
1 = HoldLastState
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 139

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

RunNetFltValue Parameter Number 46

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter determines how the starter
will be commanded in the event of a fault. Data Type BOOL
State the starter will go to on a NetFlt if
Parameter 45 (RunNetFltAction) = 1 Group Starter Protection
(GotoFault-Value).
Units —
0 = OFF
1 = ON Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

RunNetIdlAction Parameter Number 47

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 48 (RunNetIdlValue) defines Data Type BOOL
how the starter will respond when
a network is idle as determined Group Starter Protection
by Parameter 48.
Units —
0 = GoToIdleValue
1 = HoldLastState Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

RunNetIdlValue Parameter Number 48

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the state that
starter assumes when the network is idle Data Type BOOL
and Parameter 47 (RunNetIdlAction) is
set to 1. Group Starter Protection
0 = OFF Units —
1 = ON
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 0x3F
Default Value 0

User I/O Configuration Group

IOPointConfigure Parameter Number 49
Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter determines the point
that is configured: Data Type WORD
0 = Input
Group User I/O Config.
1 = Output
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 0x3F
Default Value 0

140 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

Bit
Function
5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — X Pt00
— — — — X — Pt01
— — — X — — Pt02
— — X — — — Pt03
— X — — — — Pt04
X — — — — — Pt05

FilterOffOn Parameter Number 50

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter determines the input
(which must be present for this time) Data Type USINT
before being reported ON.
Group User I/O Config.
Units msecs
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 64
Default Value 0

FilterOnOff Parameter Number 51

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter determines the input
(which must be absent for this time) Data Type USINT
before being reported OFF.
Group User I/O Config.
Units msecs
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 64
Default Value 0

OutProtFltState Parameter Number 52

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 53 (OutProtFltValue) defines Data Type BOOL
how the starter outputs will respond
when a fault occurs. Group User I/O Config.
0 = GoToPrFltValue Units —
1 = IgnorePrFlt
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 141

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

OutProtFltValue Parameter Number 53

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter determines how the starter
outputs will be commanded in the event Data Type BOOL
of a protection fault if Parameter 52
(OutProtFltState) = 0. Group User I/O Config.
0 = OFF Units —
1 = ON
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutNetFaultState Parameter Number 54

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 55 (OutNetFaultValue) defines Data Type BOOL
how the starter outputs will respond
on an Ethernet fault. Group User I/O Config.
0 = GoToFaultValue Units —
1 = HoldLastState
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutNetFaultValue Parameter Number 55

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the state that
starter outputs when an Ethernet fault Data Type BOOL
occurs and Parameter 54
(OutNetFaultState) is set to 0. Group User I/O Config.
0 = OFF Units —
1 = ON
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

OutNetIdleState Parameter Number 56

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 57 (OutNetIdleValue) defines Data Type BOOL
how the starter outputs will respond when
a network is idle. Group User I/O Config.
0 = GoToIdleValue Units —
1 = HoldLastState
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

142 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

OutNetIdleValue Parameter Number 57

Access Rule GET
This parameter determines the state that
starter outputs assumes when the Data Type BOOL
network is idle and Parameter 56
(OutNetIdleState) is set to 0. Group User I/O Config.
0 = OFF Units —
1 = ON
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Input00Function Parameter Number 58

This parameter determines the special Access Rule GET/SET

function for User Input 0:
Data Type USINT
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset Group User I/O Config.
2 = MotionDisable➊
3 = ForceSnapShot Units —
4 = UserFault
Minimum Value 0
5 = BrakeRelease➊
Maximum Value 5
➊ These choices are level sensitive.
All others are edge sensitive Default Value 0

Input01Function Parameter Number 59

This parameter determines the special Access Rule GET/SET

function for User Input 1:
Data Type USINT
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset Group User I/O Config.
2 = MotionDisable➊
3 = ForceSnapShot Units —
4 = UserFault
Minimum Value 0
5 = BrakeRelease➊
Maximum Value 5
➊ These choices are level sensitive. All
others are edge sensitive Default Value 0

Input02Function Parameter Number 60

This parameter determines the special Access Rule GET/SET

function for User Input 2:
Data Type USINT
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset Group User I/O Config.
2 = MotionDisable➊
3 = ForceSnapShot Units —
4 = UserFault
Minimum Value 0
5 = BrakeRelease➊
Maximum Value 5
➊ These choices are level sensitive. All
others are edge sensitive Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 143

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

Input03Function Parameter Number 61

This parameter determines the special Access Rule GET/SET

function for User Input 3:
Data Type USINT
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset Group User I/O Config.
2 = MotionDisable➊
3 = ForceSnapShot Units —
4 = UserFault
Minimum Value 0
5 = BrakeRelease*➊
Maximum Value 5
➊ These choices are level sensitive. All
others are edge sensitive Default Value 0

Input04Function Parameter Number 62

This parameter determines the special Access Rule GET/SET

function for User Input 4:
Data Type USINT
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset Group User I/O Config.
2 = MotionDisable➊
3 = ForceSnapShot Units —
4 = UserFault
Minimum Value 0
5 = BrakeRelease➊
Maximum Value 5
➊ These choices are level sensitive. All
others are edge sensitive Default Value 0

Input05Function Parameter Number 63

This parameter determines the special Access Rule GET/SET

function for User Input 5:
Data Type USINT
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset Group User I/O Config.
2 = MotionDisable➊
3 = ForceSnapShot Units —
4 = UserFault
Minimum Value 0
5 = BrakeRelease➊
Maximum Value 5
➊ These choices are level sensitive. All
others are edge sensitive Default Value 0

144 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

Miscellaneous Configuration Group

NetworkOverride Parameter Number 64
Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter allows for the local logic
to override a Network fault. Data Type BOOL
0 = Disable
Group Misc. Config.
1 = Enable
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

CommsOverride Parameter Number 65

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter allows for local logic to
override an I/O connection timeout. Data Type BOOL
0 = Disable
Group Misc. Config.
1 = Enable
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

KeypadMode Parameter Number 66

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter selects if the keypad
operation is maintained or momentary. Data Type BOOL
0 = Momentary
Group Misc. Config.
1 = Maintained
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

KeypadDisable Parameter Number 67

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter disables all keypad
function except for the “OFF” and “RESET” Data Type BOOL
buttons.
0 = KeypadEnabled Group Misc. Config.
1 = KeypadDisabled Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 145

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

SetToDefaults Parameter Number 68

Access Rule GET/SET
This parameter if set to “1” will set the
device to the factory defaults. Data Type BOOL
0 = NoAction
Group Misc. Config.
1 = SetToDefaults
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Advanced Configuration
AccelTime2 Parameter Number 69

When active, sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases except for jog. Related Parameters 36
Maximum Freq- = Accel Rate
-------------------------------------
Accel Time Access Rule GET/SET

Data Type UINT

Parameter 35
(Maximum Freq) Group Advanced Config.
Dec
n
atio

Units x.x secs

eler
eler

Speed
atio
Acc

Minimum Value 0.0

0
Accel Time Decel Maximum Value 600.0
0 Time 2 Time 2
Default Value 20.0

DecelTime2 Parameter Number 70

Related Parameters 37
When active, sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases except for jog.
Maximum Freq- = Decel Rate Access Rule GET/SET
-------------------------------------
Decel Time Data Type UINT
Parameter 35 Group Advanced Config.
(Maximum Freq)
Units x.x secs
Dec
n
atio

eler

Minimum Value 0.0

eler

Speed
atio
Acc

Maximum Value 600.0

0
Accel Time Decel
0 Time 2 Time 2 Default Value 20.0

146 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

MotorOLRetention Parameter Number 71

Access Rule GET/SET
Enables/disables the Motor overload
Retention function. When Enabled, the Data Type UINT
value held in the motor overload counter
is saved at power-down and restored Group Advanced Config.
at power-up. A change to this parameter
setting resets the counter. Units —
0 = Disabled (Default) Minimum Value 0
1 = Enabled
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

InternalFreq Parameter Number 72

Related Parameters 33
Provide the frequency command to drive
when Parameter 33 (Speed-Reference) = Access Rule GET/SET
1 (InternalFreq). When enabled, this
parameter will change the frequency Data Type UINT
command in real time.
Group Advanced Config.
Units x.x Hz
Minimum Value 0.0
Maximum Value 400.0
Default Value 60.0

SkipFrequency Parameter Number 73

Related Parameters 74
Sets the frequency at which the drive will
not operate. Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Advanced Config.
Units Hz
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 400 Hz
Default Value 0 Hz

SkipFrqBand Parameter Number 74

Related Parameters 73
Determines the band width around
Parameter 73 (SkipFrequency). Parameter Access Rule GET/SET
74 (SkipFreqBand) is split applying 1/2
above and 1/2 below the actual skip Data Type UINT
frequency. A setting of 0.0 disables
this parameter. Group Advanced Config.
Units x.x Hz
Minimum Value 0.0 Hz
Maximum Value 30.0 Hz
Default Value 0.0 Hz

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 147

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

Figure 54 - Skip Frequency Band

Frequency Command
Frequency

Drive Output
Frequency

2x Skip
Skip Frequency Frequency Band

Time

DCBrakeTime Parameter Number 75

Related Parameters 32, 76
Sets the length of time that DC brake current is
injected into the motor. Refer to Parameter 76 Access Rule GET/SET
(DCBrakeLevel).
Data Type UINT
Group Advanced Config.
Units x.x secs
Minimum Value 0.0
99.9
Maximum Value (Setting of 99.9 = Continuous)
Default Value 0.0

DCBrakeLevel Parameter Number 76

Related Parameters 32, 75
Defines the maximum DC brake current, in amps,
applied to the motor when Parameter 32 Access Rule GET/SET
(StopMode) is set to either
0 = RAMP or 2 = DC BRAKE. Data Type UINT
Group Advanced Config.
Units x.x Amps
Minimum Value 0.0
For 0.5 Hp units – Min = 0; Max = 2.7; Default = .1
Maximum Value Hp Dependant
For 1.0 Hp units – Min = 0; Max = 4.5; Default = .1
For 2.0Hp units – Min = 0; Max = 7.5; Default = .2 Default Value Hp Dependant

148 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

ATTENTION:

Ramp-to-Stop Mode DC Injection Braking Mode

Voltage

Vo [DC Brake Time]

lta
ge

Volts Speed
Speed

Volts Speed

}
[DC Brake Time]

}
Spee

}
d

} [DC Brake Level]

[DC Brake Level]

Time Time
Stop Command Stop Command

• If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists, an

auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used.
• This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet
motors. Motors may be demagnetized during braking.

ReverseDisable Parameter Number 77

Related Parameters —
O Stop drive before changing this
parameter. Access Rule GET/SET

Enables/disables the function that allows Data Type UINT

the direction of the motor rotation to be
changed. Group Advanced Config.
0 = Enabled Units —
1 = Disabled
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

FlyingStartEn Parameter Number 78

Access Rule GET/SET
Sets the condition that allows the drive
to reconnect to a spinning motor Data Type UINT
at actual RPM.
0 = Disabled Group Advanced Config.
1 = Enabled Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 149

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

Compensation
Parameter Number 79
Enables/disables correction options
that may improve problems with Access Rule GET/SET
motor instability,
0 = Disabled Data Type UINT
1 = Electrical (Default)
Some drive/motor combinations have
inherent instabilities which are exhibited Group Advanced Config.
as non-sinusoidal motor currents. This
setting attempts to correct this condition
Units —
2 = Mechanical
Some motor/load combinations have
mechanical resonances which can be Minimum Value 0
excited by the drive current regulator. This
setting slows down the current regulator
response and attempts to correct this Maximum Value 3
condition.
3 = Both Default Value 1

SlipHertzAtFLA Parameter Number 80

Related Parameters 30
Compensates for the inherent slip in an
induction motor. This frequency is added Access Rule GET/SET
to the commanded output frequency
based on motor current. Data Type UINT
Group Advanced Config.
Units x.x Hz
Minimum Value 0.0 Hz
Maximum Value 10.0 Hz
Default Value 2.0 Hz

BusRegulateMode Parameter Number 81

Related Parameters —
Controls the operation of the drive voltage
regulation, which is normally operational Access Rule GET/SET
at deceleration or when the bus voltage
rises. Data Type UINT
0 = Disable Group Advanced Config.
1 = Enabled
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 1
Default Value 0

150 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

ATTENTION: The bus regulator mode function is extremely useful for

preventing nuisance overvoltage faults resulting from aggressive decelerations,
overhauling loads, and eccentric loads. However, it can also cause either of the
following two conditions to occur.
1. Fast positive changes in input voltage or imbalanced input voltages can cause
uncommanded positive speed changes;
2. Actual deceleration times can be longer than commanded deceleration times.
However, a "Stall Fault" is generated if the drive remains in this state for 1 minute.
If this condition is unacceptable, the bus regulator must be disabled.

MotorOLSelect Parameter Number 82

Related Parameters 29, 30
Drive provides Class 10 motor overload
protection. Sets the derating factor for I2T Access Rule GET/SET
motor overload function.
0 = NoDerating Data Type UINT
1 = MinDerating Group Advanced Config.
2 = MaxDerating
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 2
Default Value 0

Figure 55 - Overload Trip Curves

% of Motor Overload Current (P30)

% of Motor Overload Current (P30)

% of Motor Overload Current (P30)

No Derate Min. Derate Max. Derate

100 100 100
80 80 80
60 60 60
40 40 40
20 20 20
0 0 0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
% of Motor Nameplate Hertz (P29) % of Motor Nameplate Hertz (P29) % of Motor Nameplate Hertz (P29)

SWCurrentTrip Parameter Number 83

Related Parameter 30
Enables/disables a software instantaneous
(within 100 ms) current trip. Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Advanced Config.
Units x.x Amps
Minimum Value 0.0
For 0.5 Hp units – Min = 0; Max = 3.0; Default = 0
Maximum Value Hp Dependent
For 1.0 Hp units – Min = 0; Max = 5.0; Default = 0
For 2.0Hp units – Min = 0; Max = 8.4; Default = 0 Default Value 0.0 (Disabled)

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 151

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

AutoRstrtTries Parameter Number 84

Related Parameter 85
Set the maximum number of times the drive
attempts to reset a fault and restart. Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Advanced Config.
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 9
Default Value 0

Clear a Type 1 Fault and Restart the Drive

1. Set Parameter 84 (AutoRestartTries) to a value other than 0.

2. Set Parameter 85 (AutoRestartDelay) to a value other than 0.

Clear an Overvoltage, Undervoltage, or Heatsink OvrTmp Fault without Restarting the Drive

1. Set Parameter 84 (AutoRestartTries) to a value other than 0.

2. Set Parameter 85 (AutoRestartDelay) to 0.

ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this

parameter is used in an inappropriate application. Do not use this function
without considering applicable local, national, and international codes,
standards, regulations, or industry guidelines.

152 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

AutoRstrtDelay Parameter Number 85

Related Parameter 84
Sets time between restart attempts when
Parameter 84(Auto Rstrt Tries) is set to a Access Rule GET/SET
value other than zero.
Data Type UINT
Group Advanced Config.
Units x.x secs
Minimum Value 0.0
Maximum Value 120.0
Default Value 1.0

BoostSelect Parameter Number 86

Related Parameters 28, 29
Sets the boost voltage (% of Parameter 28
[MotorNPVolts]) and redefines the Volts Access Rule GET/SET
per Hz curve.
Data Type UINT
See Table 24 for details. Group Advanced Config.
Units —
Minimum Value 1
Maximum Value 14
Default Value 8

Table 24 - Boost Select Options

Options Description
Custom V/Hz
1 30.0, VT
Variable Torque
2 35.0, VT (Typical fan/pump curves)
3 40.0, VT
4 45.0, VT
5 0.0 no IR
6 0.0
7 2.5, CT
8 5.0, CT (default)
9 7.5, CT
Constant Torque
10 10.0, CT
11 12.5, CT
12 15.0, CT
13 17.5, CT
14 20.0, CT

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 153

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

Figure 56 - Boost Select

100

%P28 [Motor NP Volts]

1/2 [Motor NP Volts]
50
4
3
2
1

[Motor NP Hertz]
1/2
Settings
5-14

0 50 100
%P29 [Motor NP Hertz]

MaximumVoltage Parameter Number 87

Related Parameters —
Sets the highest voltage the drive will output.
Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Advanced Config.
Units V AC
Minimum Value 20V AC
Maximum Value 460V AC
Default Value 2V AC

MotorNamePlateFLA Parameter Number 88

Related Parameters —
Set to the motor nameplate Full Load Amps.
Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Advanced Config.
Units x.x Amps
Minimum Value 0.0
For 0.5 Hp units – Min = 0; Max = 3.0; Default = 1.5
Maximum Value Hp Dependent
For 1.0 Hp units – Min = 0; Max = 5.0; Default = 2.5
For 2.0Hp units – Min = 0; Max = 8.4; Default = 3.6 Default Value Hp Dependent

154 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters Chapter 4

BrakeMode Parameter Number 89

Related Parameters —
This parameter determines the source
brake control mode. Access Rule GET/SET
0 = NoBrakeControl
Data Type UINT
1 = AboveFrequency
2 = AboveCurrent Group Advanced Config.
Units —
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 2
Default Value 1

BrakeFreqThresh Parameter Number 90

Related Parameters —
This parameter determines the frequency
above which the source brake is released. Access Rule GET/SET
Data Type UINT
Group Advanced Config.
Units x.x Hz
Minimum Value 0.0
Maximum Value 999.9
Default Value 0.0

BrakeCurrThresh Parameter Number 91

Related Parameters —
This parameter determines the motor
current above which the source brake Access Rule GET/SET
is released.
Data Type UINT
Group Advanced Config.
Units x.xx Amps
Minimum Value 0.0
Maximum Value 8.0
Default Value 0.0

IMPORTANT For parameter 90 and 91 the value of the threshold can be set beyond the
operational maximum limit of the product, or at a level which may cause
multiple transitions during operation. Threshold values near the operational
levels should be avoided.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 155

Chapter 4 Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters

Notes:

156 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Chapter 5

Diagnostics

Overview This chapter describes the fault diagnostics of the ArmorStart LT Distributed
Motor Controller and the conditions that cause various faults to occur.

Status LEDs and Reset Figure 57 - Status and Diagnostic LEDs and Reset

ArmorStart LT provides comprehensive status and diagnostics via 12 individually

marked LEDs shown in Figure 57, located on the ECM module. In addition, a
local reset is provide for clearing of faults. Table 25 details the diagnostic and
status LEDs.
Table 25 - ArmorStart LT Status and Diagnostics Indicators
Indicator Description Color_1 Color_2
PWR LED The bicolor (green/yellow) LED shows the Solid green is illuminated when switched Solid yellow is illuminated when switched
state of the control voltage. When LED is and unswitched control power is within its or unswitched control power is outside its
off, switched and/or unswitched power is specified limits and has the proper polarity. specified limits or has incorrect polarity.
not present. Flashing yellow indicates line voltage is not
present (Bulletin 294 units only).
RUN/FLT LED The bicolor (green/red) LED combines the Solid green is illuminated when a Run The LED will blink red in a prescribed fault
functions of the Run and Fault LEDs. command is present. pattern when a protection fault (trip)
condition is present. See table for fault
blink patterns.
NS – Network Status The bicolor (green/red) LED indicates the Flashing green indicates an IP address is Flashing red indicates the connection has
LED status of the CIP network connection. See configured, no CIP connections are timed out. Steady Red indicates a duplicate
Network Status Indicator for further established, and an Exclusive Owner IP Address detected.
information. connection has not timed out.
Flashing bicolor (red/green) indicates a Steady green indicates at least one CIP
self-test on power up. connection is established and an Exclusive
Owner connection has not timed out.
LS1 and LS2 – Link The bicolor (green/yellow) LED shows the Solid green is illuminated when a link has Solid yellow is illuminated when a link has
Status LEDs activity/link status of each EtherNet/IP been established at 100 Mbps. been established at 10 Mbps.
port.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 157

Chapter 5 Diagnostics

Table 25 - ArmorStart LT Status and Diagnostics Indicators

Indicator Description Color_1 Color_2
MS – Module Status The bicolor (green/red) LED indicates the Flashing green indicates the device has not Flashing red indicates a resettable
LED status of the module. been assigned an IP address. protection fault exists or the node address
Flashing bicolor (red/green) indicates a Steady green indicates the device is switches have been changed without a
self-test on power up. configured and operational. power cycle and do not match the in-use
configuration.
Steady red indicates a non-resettable
protection fault exists.
I/O Status Six yellow LEDs are numbered 0…5 and Yellow is illuminated when input is valid or Off when input is not valid or the output is
Enunciators 0…5 indicate the status of the input/output output is on. not turned on.
LEDs connectors. One LED for each I/O point.
Reset Button The blue reset button will cause a — —
protection fault reset to occur.

Fault Diagnostics Fault diagnostics capabilities built in the ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor
Controller are designed to help you pinpoint a problem for easy troubleshooting
and quick restarting.

Protection Faults

Protection faults will be generated when potentially dangerous or damaging

conditions are detected. Protection faults are also known as “trips” or “faults”.
These faults will be reported in multiple formats, including:

• Bit enumeration in the TripStatus parameter (parameter 16) used as

discrete bits or in DeviceLogix

• In the ArmorStart LT web server for ArmorStart EtherNet/IP version

• As a sequence of LED flashes on the ECM

LED Flash Bit Enumeration Bulletin 290E/291E Trip Status Bits Bulletin 294E Trip Status Bits
1 0 OverloadTrip ➊ OverloadTrip ➊
2 1 PhaseLossTrip PhaseLShortTrip
3 2 UnderPowerTrip ➊ UnderPowerTrip ➊
4 3 SensorShortTrip ➊ SensorShortTrip ➊
5 4 PhaseImbalTrip OverCurrentTrip
6 5 NonVolMemoryTrip ➊ NonVolMemoryTrip ➊
7 6 reserved ParamSyncTrip ➊
8 7 JamTrip DCBusOrOpenDiscnnct ➊
9 8 StallTrip StallTrip ➊
10 9 UnderloadTrip OverTemperature ➊
11 10 reserved GroundFault ➊
12 11 reserved RestartRetries
13 12 reserved DriveHdwFault ➊

158 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Diagnostics Chapter 5

LED Flash Bit Enumeration Bulletin 290E/291E Trip Status Bits Bulletin 294E Trip Status Bits
14 13 OutputShortTrip ➊ OutputShortTrip ➊
15 14 UserDefinedTrip UserDefinedTrip
16 15 HardwareFltTrip ➊ HardwareFltTrip ➊

➊ Can not be disabled.

A “ProtectFltEnable” parameter (param 42) is used to enable and disable

individual protection faults. This parameter will be a bit enumerated parameter
with each “disable fault” bit enumerated. Not all Faults can be disabled. Setting a
bit to the value “1” enables the corresponding protection fault. Clearing a bit
disables the protection fault. For protection faults that can not be disabled the
value is always “1”.

There are two Protection Fault Reset modes: manual and automatic. When
parameter 41 “ProtFltResetMode” is set to the value 0=Manual mode, a manual
fault reset must occur before the fault is reset. When manual reset mode faults are
latched until a fault reset command has been detected either locally or remotely.
A Manual reset operation is either remotely via the network, locally via the
“Reset” button on the front keypad, or via a DeviceLogix program. A rising edge
(0 to 1 transition) of the “ResetFault” tag will attempt a reset. A rising edge of the
parameter 44 “ProtectFltReset” will attempt a reset. A press of the local blue
“Reset” button on the front keypad will attempt a reset. A rising edge of the
“ResetFault” DeviceLogix tag will attempt a reset. When “ProtFltResetMode” is
set to the value 1=Automatic, “auto-reset” faults are cleared automatically when
the fault condition goes away.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 159

Chapter 5 Diagnostics

Quick Reference The LEDs on the front of the ArmorStart LT provide an indication as to the
health of the device and network. The following is a brief troubleshooting guide.
Troubleshooting
Table 26 - LED Status Indication
Status LED Description Recommended Action
PWR (Control) Status Indicator
Off The PWR LED is not illuminated at all. Verify power is connected and with proper polarity.
Green Voltage is present. No action
Flashing Yellow Power has fallen below minimum acceptable level. Verify that the control power is between 19.2 and 26V DC.
RUN/FLT Status Indicator
Off The RUN/FLT LED is not illuminated when a Run command has Verify that PLC is in Run mode. Verify that the correct run
been issued. bit is being controlled. Verify that a stop condition does
not exist.
Green Valid start command No action
Flashing Red Protection fault Count flashes and refer to Table 27 and 28.
MS – Module Status Indicator
Off The MS LED is not illuminated. Check to make sure the product is properly wired and
configured on the network.
Steady Green Device configured and operational No action
Flashing Green Device IP Address has not been configured. . Configure IP Address
Flashing Red Resettable protection fault exists. Verify fault by reviewing [TripStatus] Parameter 16 and
[TripLog0…4] Parameters 18…22. Correct and press the
blue reset button.
Solid Red Non-resettable protection fault exists. Verify fault by reviewing [TripStatus] Parameter 16 and
[TripLog0…4] Parameters 18…22. Correct and cycle
control power (switched and unswitched).
Flashes Green-Red Self-test on power up No action
NS – Network Status Indicator
Off The NS LED is not illuminated. Check to make sure the product is properly wired
and configured on the network.
Steady Green CIP connection is established. No action
Flashing Green An IP address is configured, but no CIP connections are Check to make sure the product is properly wired
established, and an Exclusive Owner connection has not timed
out. and configured on the network.

Flashing Red Connection has timed out. Check to make sure the PLC is operating correctly and that
there are no media/cabling issues. Check to see if other
network devices are in a similar state.
Solid Red Duplicate IP address detected Check for node address conflict and resolve.
Flashes The device has not completed the initialization, is not on an Remove or change the IP address of the conflicting device.
Green-Red active network, or has not finished self test at power up.
LS1 and LS2 Port Activity/Status
Off No link established. Verify network connection.
Green Link established at 100 Mbps. No action
Flashing Green Transmit or receive activity present at 100 Mbps. No action
Yellow Link established at 10 Mbps. No action

160 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Diagnostics Chapter 5

Table 26 - LED Status Indication

Status LED Description Recommended Action
Flashing Yellow Transmit or receive activity present at 10 Mbps. No action
I/O Status Indicators
Off The user has plugged into the I/O, but the indicator did not Verify the wiring of Input or Output is correct. When used
illuminate, once initiated. as an output point, ensure the corresponding bit in
parameter 49 [IOPointConfiguration] is set to Output.

Fault LED Indications The RUN/FLT LED will blink red in a prescribed fault pattern when a
protection fault (trip) condition is present. The LED will blink in 0.5 second
intervals when indicating a fault code. Once the pattern is finished, there will be a
2 second pause after which the pattern will be repeated.

Bulletin 290E/291E Faults

Bulletin 290E/291E faults are detected by the main control board. When the
[ProtFltResetMode] Parameter 41 is set to the value 1=Automatic, the auto
resettable faults in the table will reset automatically when the fault condition is
no longer present.
Table 27 - Fault LED Indicator for Bulletin 290E/291E
Blink Bulletin 290E/291E
Pattern Auto-Reset Disable Default Trip Status Description Action
1 Yes No On Overload Trip The load has drawn excessive current and Verify that the load is operating correctly and is
based on the trip class selected, the device properly set-up, [FLASetting] Parameter 28,
has tripped. [OLResetLevel] Parameter 29. The fault may be reset
only after the motor has sufficiently cooled.
2 Yes Yes Off Phase Loss Trip The ArmorStart LT has detected a missing This fault is generated by monitoring the relative
phase. levels of the 3-phase currents. Correct phase
imbalance or disable fault using [ProtectFltEnable]
Parameter 42.
3 Yes No On Under Power Trip The ArmorStart LT detected switched or Check control voltage, wiring, and proper polarity (A1/
unswitched power dip below 19.2 V for A2/A3 terminal).
greater than 50 ms, or 13 V for greater
than 4 ms.
4 No No On Sensor Short Trip This error indicates a shorted sensor, Correct, isolated or remove wiring error prior to
shorted input device, wiring input restarting the system.
mistakes.
5 Yes Yes Off Phase Imbalance Trip The ArmorStart LT has detected a current Check the power system for current imbalance and
imbalance in one of the phases. correct. Correct phase imbalance or disable fault using
[ProtectFltEnable] Parameter 42.
6 No No On Non-Volatile Memory This is a major fault, which renders the 1. If the fault was initiated by a transient, power
Trip ArmorStart LT inoperable. Possible causes cycling may clear the problem.
of this fault are transients induced during 2. This fault may be reset by a [SetToDefaults]
Non-Volatile Storage (NVS) routines. Parameter 68.
3. Replacement of the ArmorStart LT may be required.
7 — — — Reserved — —

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 161

Chapter 5 Diagnostics

Table 27 - Fault LED Indicator for Bulletin 290E/291E

Blink Bulletin 290E/291E
Pattern Auto-Reset Disable Default Trip Status Description Action
8 No Yes Off Jam Trip During normal running (after starting 1. Check for the source of the jam (for example,
period), the RMS current draw exceeds the excessive load or mechanical transmission
prescribed fault level. This fault is generated component failure).
when current is greater than the Jam Trip 2. Check [JamInhibitTime] Parameter 70,
Level for longer than the Jam Delay time [JamTripDelay] Parameter 71, and [JamTripLevel]
after the Jam Inhibit time has expired. Parameter 72 setting.
9 No Yes Off Stall Trip During starting, the motor did not reach 1. Check for source of stall (for example, excessive
running speed within the prescribed load, or mechanical transmission component
period. This fault is generated when the failure).
RMS current is greater than 2. Check [StallEnabledTime] Parameter 74 and
[StallTripLevel] Parameter 75 or longer [StallTripLevel] Parameter 75.
than [StallEnbldTime] Parameter 74 3. Check if [FLASetting] Parameter 28 is set correctly.
during motor starting.
10 No Yes Off Underload Trip Underload protection is for undercurrent Check motor and mechanical system for broken shaft,
monitoring. A trip occurs when the motor belts, or gear box. Check [ULInhibitTime] Parameter
current drops below the trip level. 76, [ULTripDelay] Parameter 77, [ULTripLevel]
Parameter 78, and [ULWarningLevel] Parameter 79.
11 — — — Reserved — —
12 — — — Reserved — —
13 — — — Reserved — —
14 No No On Output Short Trip This fault is generated when a hardware Correct, isolate or remove wiring error prior to
output short circuit condition is detected. restarting the system.
15 Yes Yes Off User Defined Trip This fault is generated either in response This fault is generated based on user configuration.
to the rising edge of user input 0...5, This fault may be reset after the condition that caused
[Input00Function...Input- 05Function] it is removed. For example, the Auxiliary Input goes
Parameter 58...63, or by DeviceLogix. low or the DeviceLogix logic drives the bit low.
16 No No On Hardware Fault Trip This fault indicates that a serious Power cycle to correct. If fault persists the ArmorStart
hardware problem exists. LT requires replacement.

162 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Diagnostics Chapter 5

Bulletin 294E Faults Bulletin 294E faults are detected by the main control board and/or the internal
drive. When there is an internal drive fault, the main control board simply polls
the drive for the existence of faults and reports the fault state. Writing a value to
[ProtFltResetMode] Parameter 41 determines auto-reset ability for some faults.
The auto-reset ability of faults that are generated on the drive are controlled by
[AutoRestartTries] Parameter 84 and [AutoRestar Delay] Parameter 85.

Auto Reset
Table 28 - Auto Reset Ability
Auto Reset Function Description
Drive Control Auto-Reset/Run When this type of fault occurs, and [AutoRestartTries] Parameter 84 is set to a value greater than “0,” a user-configurable timer,
[AutoRestartDelay] Parameter 85, begins. When the timer reaches zero, the drive attempts to automatically reset the fault. If the
condition that caused the fault is no longer present, the fault will be reset and the drive will be restarted.
No User Action Needed This type of fault requires drive or motor repair, or is caused by wiring or programing errors. The cause of the fault must be
corrected before the fault can be cleared via manual or network reset. A rising edge of the “Fault Reset” DeviceLogix bit will also
clear the fault.
Yes [ProtFltResetMode] Faults are cleared automatically when the fault condition goes away.
Parameter 41 = 1 which
is automatic

Table 29 - Fault LED Indicator for Bulletin 294E

Blink Auto-Reset Bulletin 294E
Pattern Capable Disable Default Trip Status Description Action
1 Drive No On Overload Trip This fault is a result of the drive’s Motor The fault may be reset only after the overload
Controlled (PF 4M Codes 7 and Overload fault or the Drive Overload fault. algorithm determines that the motor has sufficiently
64) Exceeding the Drive overload rating of cooled or that the Drive heatsink temperature falls to
150% for 1 minute or 200% for 3 seconds an acceptable level. Check the following:
caused the device to trip. 1. Excessive motor load. Reduce load so drive output
current does not exceed the current set by
[MotorOLCurrent] Parameter 30.
2. Verify [BoostSelect] Parameter 86 setting.
2 No No On Phase Short This fault is a result of the drive’s Phase to 1. Check the wiring between the drive and motor.
(PF 4M Codes Ground Short faults (Codes 38…40) or 2. Check motor for grounded phase.
38…43) Phase to Phase Short faults (Codes 3. Replace ArmorStart LT if fault cannot be cleared.
41…43).
3 Yes No On Under Power Trip The ArmorStart LT detected switched or Check control voltage, wiring, and proper polarity (A1/
unswitched power dip below 19.2 V for A2 terminal). Correct power loss or disable fault using
greater than 50 ms, or 13 V for greater [ProtectFltEnable] Parameter 42.
than 4 ms.
4 No No On Sensor Short Trip This error indicates a shorted sensor, Correct, isolated or remove wiring error prior to
shorted input device, wiring input restarting the system.
mistakes.
5 Drive No On Over Current This fault is a result of the drive’s HW 1. Check for excess load, improper [BoostSelect]
Controlled (PF 4M Codes 12 and OverCurrent fault or it’s SW OverCurrent Parameter 86 setting or other causes of excess
63) fault. current or
2. Check load requirements and [SWCurrentTrip]
Parameter 83 setting.
6 No No On Non-Volatile Memory This is a major fault, which renders the 1. If the fault was initiated by a transient, power
Trip ArmorStart LT inoperable. Possible causes cycling may clear the problem.
(PF 4M Code 100) of this fault are transients induced during 2. This fault may be reset by a [SetToDefaults]
Non-Volatile Storage (NVS) routines. Parameter 68.
3. Replacement of the ArmorStart LT may be required.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 163

Chapter 5 Diagnostics

Table 29 - Fault LED Indicator for Bulletin 294E

Blink Auto-Reset Bulletin 294E
Pattern Capable Disable Default Trip Status Description Action
7 Yes No On Parameter Sync (PF This fault is generated during the 1. The most common cause of this fault is that the
4M Codes 48, 71 parameter synchronization procedure disconnect has been opened, or that power has
and 81) between the Control Module and the been removed from the drive. To clear the fault,
internal drive when the syncing process repower the drive and activate a reset.
fails resulting in the drive configuration 2. The drive may have been commanded to default
not matching the Control Module values. Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive.
configuration.
8 Drive No On DCBusOrDiscnnct ➊ This fault is a result of the drive’s Power 1. The most common cause of this fault is that the
Controlled (PF 4M Codes 3, 4 Loss (PF 4M Code 3), UnderVoltage (PF 4M disconnect has been opened, or that power has
and 5) Code 4) and OverVoltage (PF 4M Code 5) been removed from the drive. To Clear the fault,
faults. When an Undervoltage occurs repower the drive and activate a reset.
because the Disconnect has been opened, 2. Monitor the incoming line for phase loss or line
the condition will be diagnosed as an imbalance, low voltage or line power interruption.
“Open Disconnect” trip high line voltage or transient conditions. Bus
OverVoltage can also be caused by motor
regeneration.
3. Extending the [DecelTime1] Parameter 37 or
[DecelTime2] Parameter 70 may also help with this
fault.
9 Drive No On Stall Trip During starting the motor did not reach 1. Check for source of stall (for example, excessive
Controlled (PF 4M Code 6) running speed within the prescribed load, or mechanical transmission component
period. This fault occurs when the drive failure).
detects a motor stall condition during 2. Increase [AccelTime1] Parameter 36 or
acceleration. [AccelTime2] Parameter 69 or reduce load so drive
output current does not exceed the current set by
[CurrentLimit] Parameter 31.
10 Drive No On Over Temperature This fault occurs when the drive detects a Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins. Verify that
Controlled (PF 4M Code 8) heat sink over temperature condition. ambient temperature has not exceeded 40° C (104° F).
11 No No On Ground Fault This fault occurs a current path to earth Check the motor and external wiring to the drive
(PF 4M Code 13) ground has been detected at one or more output terminals for a grounded condition.
of the drive output terminals.
12 No No On Restart Retries Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset a Correct the cause of the fault and manually clear.
(PF 4M Code 33) fault and resume running for the Check [AutoRestartTries] Parameter 84 and
programmed number of auto retries. [AutoRestartDelay] Parameter 85 meets application
needs.
13 No No On Drive Hardware Fault Failure has been detected in the drive 1. Cycle power.
power section. 2. Replace unit if failure can not be cleared.
14 No No On Output Short This fault is generated when a hardware Correct, isolate or remove wiring error prior to
output short circuit condition is detected. restarting the system.
15 Yes Yes Off User Defined This fault is generated either in response This fault is generated based on user configuration.
to the rising edge of user input 0...5, This fault may be reset after the condition that caused
[Input00Function...Input- 05Function] it is removed. For example, the Auxiliary Input goes
Parameter 58...63. low or the DeviceLogix logic drives the bit low.
16 No No On Hardware Fault Trip This fault indicates that a serious Power cycle to correct. If fault persists the ArmorStart
hardware problem exists. This fault is LT requires replacement.
generated when either the PF 4M drive is
not detected or an invalid factory
configuration setting is detected.

➊ In the case of a Disconnect open fault, reclosing the disconnect will cause a reset to be issued.

164 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Chapter 6

Specifications

Bulletin 290E/291E
Electrical Ratings
Application Three-phase
Number of Poles 3
Input Power Terminals L1, L2, L3
Motor Power Terminals T1, T2, T3
PE (Earth Ground) Terminal 4 PE terminals
Maximum Rated Operating Voltage 400Y/230…480Y/277 (-15%, +10%)
Rated Impulsed Voltage (Uimp) 4 kV
Dielectric Withstand UL: 1960V AC, IEC: 2500V AC
Operating Frequency 50/60 Hz (±10%)
Cat. No. Hp (kW) Overload Range
Power Circuit 290_-___-A-*
Maximum Rated Operating 2 (1.5) 0.24…3.5 A
291_-___-A-*
Current
290_-___-B-*
5 (3) 1.1…7.6 A
291_-___-B-*
Overload Type Solid-state I2T
[10], 15, 20 with thermal memory retention
Trip Class
(see Motor Overload Trip Curves)
Trip Rating — Full Load 120% of FLC
Current (FLC)
Reset Mode Automatic or manual
Overload Reset Level 1…100% TCU
Overvoltage Category III

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 165

Chapter 6 Specifications

Electrical Ratings
Power Supply NEC Class 2
Rated Operating Voltage 24V DC (+10%, -20%)
Overvoltage Protection Reverse-polarity protected
Voltage 19.2…26.4V DC
Nominal Current 150 mA
Power 3.6 W
Unswitched Power Supply Input Current (each) ➊ 50 mA
Requirements
Maximum Current 450 mA
Maximum Power 14.4 W
Peak Inrush ➋ <5 A for 35 ms
Voltage 19.2…26.4V DC
Nominal Current 125 mA
Control Circuit
Power 3W
(External Source)
Switched Power Supply Output Current (each) ➊ 500 mA
Requirements
Maximum Current 1.625 A
Maximum Power 42 W
Peak Inrush ➋ <5 A for 35 ms
Voltage 19.2…26.4V DC
Nominal Current 275 mA
Power 6.6 W

Switched and Unswitched Number of Inputs (x 50 mA) user defined

Power Supply Requirements Number of Outputs (x 500 mA) user defined
Maximum Current 275 mA + user defined
Maximum Power 6.6 W + (24V DC x user defined)
Peak Inrush ➋ <10 for 35 ms
Control Circuit
An internal 50 W power supply sources 24V DC for input, outputs, and logic control.
(Internal Source)
Cat. No. Sym. Amps RMS Circuit Breaker Fuse
CC, J, or T fuse
Short Circuit 290/1_-*-G1 (or G3) 10 kA @ 480Y/277 (maximum 45 A)
Current Rating When used with Allen Bradley
(SCCR) 290/1_-*-G1 (or G3) 5 kA @ 480Y/277 UL Class fuse (maximum 45 A)
Cat. No. 140U-D6D3-C30
CC, J, or T fuse
290/1_-*-G2 10 kA @ 480Y/277 (maximum 40 A)

Short Circuit Type 1

Coordination Size per NFPA 70 (NEC) or NFPA 79 for Group Motor Applications
➊ I/O is configurable to either input or output.
➋ Assumes zero wire resistance. Wire impedance will reduce current inrush.

166 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Specifications Chapter 6

Input and Output Ratings

Supply Voltage Unswitched power A3/A2
Type of Inputs 24V DC current sinking
Connection Type Single keyed M12, quick disconnect
Input per Connection 1/each
Rated Operating Voltage 24V DC
On-State Input Voltage (pin 4) 10…26.4V DC, nominal 24V DC
Off-State Input Voltage 5V DC
On-State Input Current (pin 4) 1…3.7 mA, 2.6 mA @ 24V DC
Input Off-State Input Current <1.5 mA
Maximum Sensor Leakage Current <2.5 mA
Maximum Number of Input Devices 6
Maximum Sensor Sourcing Current (pin 1) 50 mA per point (max 300 mA total for sourcing one device)
Sensor Operating Voltage Range 19.2…26V DC
Input Bounce Filter ➊ Off-On or On-Off: 0.5 ms + 64 ms
(Software Configurable)
Filtering 100 μs
DeviceLogix I/O Response 2 ms (500 Hz)
Supply Voltage (Switched Power) A1/A2
Type of Outputs DC sourcing
Load Types Resistive or light inductive
Utilization Category (IEC) DC-1, DC-13
Output State Normally Open (N.O.)
Connection Type Single keyed M12, quick disconnect
Output per Connection 1/each
Overcurrent Protection ➋ 1.5 A (the sum of all outputs cannot exceed this value)
Output
Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) UL: 1500V AC, IEC: 2000V AC
Rated Operating Voltage (Ue) 19.2…26.4V DC
Maximum Blocking Voltage 35V DC
Nominal Operating Current (Ie) 500 mA per point
Maximum Thermal Current (Ithe) 500 mA per point
Maximum Off-state Leakage Current 1 μA
Maximum Number of Outputs 6
Surge Suppression Integrated diode to protect against switching loads
➊ Input ON-to-OFF delay time is the time from a valid input signal to recognition by the module.
➋ If an output exceeds 1.5 A for greater than 7 ms, a fault is generated.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 167

Chapter 6 Specifications

Environmental Ratings
Operating Temperature Range -20…+50 °C (-4…+122 °F)
Storage and Transportation Temperature Range -25...+85 °C (-13…+185 °F)
Altitude 2000 m
Humidity 5…95% (non-condensing)
Pollution Degree 3
Enclosure Ratings IP66/UL Type 4/12 ➊
Approximate Shipping Weight 4.6 kg (10 lb)

Mechanical Ratings
Operational 30 G, exceeds IEC 60947-1
Resistance to Shock
Non-Operational 50 G, exceeds IEC 60947-1
Operational 2.5 G, tested to MIL-STD-810G, exceeds IEC 60947-1
Resistance to Vibration
Non-Operational 5 G, tested to MIL-STD-810G, exceeds IEC 60947-1
Disconnect Lock Out Maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) diameter lock shackle or hasp
Disconnect LOTO Locks Up to 2 locks or hasps are supported
Disconnect Mechanical Life 200 000 operations
Contractor Utilization Category
AC-1, AC-3, AC-4 (refer to Life Load Curves)
(IEC)
Contactor Opening Delay 8…12 ms
Contactor Closing Delay 18…40 ms
Minimum Off Time 200 ms
Contactor Mechanical Life 15 million operations
Power Terminals Motor Terminals Control Terminals PE/Ground
(2) #18 …#10 AWG #18…#10 AWG (2) #18 …#10 AWG (2) #16 …#10 AWG
Wire Size➋
(0.8…5.2 mm2) per terminal (0.8…5.2 mm2) per terminal (0.8…5.2 mm2) per terminal (1.3…5.2 mm2) per terminal
Wire Type Multi-strand copper wire
Tightening Torque 10.6 ± 2 lb•in (1.2 ± 0.2 N•m) 18 ± 2 lb•in (2 ± 0.2 N•m)
Wire Strip Length 0.35 ± 0.01 in. (9 ± 2 mm)
Power Rating 600V AC/25 Amp 600 V AC/10 Amp 600 V AC/10 Amp —

Emission and Immunity Ratings

Conducted EN 60947-4-1
Radiated Class A

Emission Electrostatic Discharge 4 kV contact, 8 kV air

EN 60947-4-1
Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field 10V/m, 80 MHz…1 GHz
10V/m, 1.4 GHz…2 GHz
2 kV (Power)
Fast Transient 2 kV (PE)
1 kV (Communication and control)
Immunity
Surge Transient 1 kV (12) L-L, 2 kV (2) L-N (earth)
Radio Frequency Conducted Disturbance 10V, 150 kHz…80 MHz
➊ IP66/UL Type 4 is available with gland options G1-3. IP66/UL Type 4/12 available with G1 and G3 gland option
➋ When two wires used in terminal block both wires are to be of same wire AWG.

168 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Specifications Chapter 6

Standards Compliance and Certifications

UL/CSA EN/IEC Other Agencies
CCC (Pending)
Standards Compliance UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment – EN 60947-4-1 Low Voltage Switchgear
KCC
Suitable for Group Installation CE Marked per Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
C-Tick
CSA C22.2, No. 14 and EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
ODVA for EtherNet/IP and DeviceNet
Certifications cULus (File No. E3125, Guide NLDX, NLDX7)

Communication Ratings
Rated Insulation Voltage 250V
Operating Dielectric Withstand UL/NEMA: 1500V AC, IEC: 2000V AC
EtherNet/IP ODVA – Conformance Testing EtherNet/IP Interoperability Performance – Per A9 PF 2.1
Ethernet Communication Rate 10/100 Mbps, half or full-duplex
Ethernet Ports 2 (embedded switch)
Ethernet Network Topologies Supported Star, Tree, Linear, and Ring
Device Level Ring Support Beacon Performance, IEEE 1588 Transparent Clock
Ethernet Connector M12, D code, female, with Ethernet keying, 4 Pin
Ethernet Cable Category 5e: Shielded or unshielded
IP Configuration Static, DHCP, or BootP
EtherNet/IP DHCP Timeout 30 s
Data Transported over both TCP and UDP
500 packets-per-second (2000 μs), Tx
Packet Rate (pps)
500 packets-per-second (2000 μs), Rx
Consume Instance (Command) Default of 3 words (Instance 150)
Produce Instance (Status) Default of 14 words (Instance 152)
Message Support Unicast or Multicast
Address Conflict Detection (ACD) IP v4 Address Conflict Detection for EtherNet/IP devices
Sockets 150 maximum
Security Login and password configurable
E-mail Support Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
Web Server Webpage Features Status, diagnostics, configuration
Concurrent Sessions 20
Web Server HTTP 1.1
Concurrent TCP Connections Maximum of 15 encapsulated messages over both TCP and UDP
Supports up to 2 Class 1 CIP connections [Exclusive owner (data) or
Maximum I/O Connections (CIP Class 1) listen-only]. One connection per PLC. Listen only connection requires a
data connection to be established.
Network Connections Maximum Concurrent Explicit Messages (CIP Class 3) 6
Class 1 Connection API 2…3200 ms
Class 3 Connection API 100…10 000 ms
Request Packet Interval (RPI) 20 ms default (2 ms minimum)

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 169

Chapter 6 Specifications

Motor Overload Trip Curves

Class 10

Approximate Trip Time [s] Cold

Hot

% Full Load Current

Class 15
Approximate Trip Time [s]

Cold
Hot

% Full Load Current

Class 20
Approximate Trip Time [s]

Cold
Hot

% Full Load Current

170 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Specifications Chapter 6

Bulletin 100-K/104-K Life-Load Curves

Electrical life; Ue = 400…460V AC

AC-3: Switching of squirrel-cage motors while starting

10
Contact Life (millions of operations)

100-K09
(Used with ArmorStart LT)

0.1

0.01
1 10 100
Rated Current Ie AC-3 [A]

Electrical life; Ue = 400…460V AC

AC-4: Stepping of squirrel-cage motors
10
(Used with ArmorStart LT)
100-K09
Contact Life (millions of operations)

0.1

0.01
0.1 1 10
Rated Current Ie AC-4 [A]

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 171

Chapter 6 Specifications

Bulletin 294E
Electrical Ratings
Application Three-phase
Number of Poles 3
Input Power Terminals L1, L2, L3
Motor Power Terminals T1, T2, T3
Power Circuit PE (Earth Ground) Terminal 4 PE terminals
Maximum Rated Operating Voltage 400Y/230…480Y/277 (-15%, +10%)
Rated Impulsed Voltage (Uimp) 4 kV
Dielectric Withstand UL: 1960V AC, IEC: 2500V AC
Operating Frequency 50/60 Hz (±10%)

Electrical Ratings — Variable Frequency Drive

Input Amps Input Amps

Cat. No. Hp (kW) Output Amps
400V AC, 50 Hz 480V AC, 60 Hz
Maximum Rated 294_-FD1P5* 0.5 (0.37) 2.0 1.8 1.5
Operating Current
294_-FD2P5* 1.0 (0.75) 3.7 3.0 2.5
294_-FD4P2* 2.0 (1.5) 6.5 5.5 3.6
Solid-state I2T type 150% for 60 s or 200% for 3 s
Overload Protection Trip Class Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response and power-down overload retention function
Overcurrent Protection 200% hardware limit, 300% instantaneous fault
Overvoltage Category III
Reset Mode Automatic or manual
Output Frequency 0…400 Hz (programmable)
Power Circuit Efficiency 97.5% typical
Overvoltage 380…480V AC Input – Trip occurs at 810V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 575V AC incoming line)
Undervoltage 380…480V AC Input – Trip occurs at 390V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 275V AC incoming line)
Control Ride Through Minimum ride through is 0.5 s — typical value is 2 s
Faultless Power Ride Through 10 ms
Carrier Frequency 2…10 kHz, drive rating based on 4 kHz
Speed Regulation — Open Loop ±2% of base speed across a 40:1 speed range
with Slip Compensation
Two independently programmable acceleration and deceleration times. Each time may
Acceleration/Deceleration be programmed from 0…600 s, in 0.1 s increments.
Maximum Motor Cable Lengths (Reflected 10 m (32 ft)(CE application)➋
Wave Protection) ➊ 14 m (45.9 ft) (non-CE application)
Source Brake (EM Brake) Current Maximum load current of 3 A
➊ The reflected wave data applies to all frequencies 2…10 kHz.
➋ For CE compliant installations refer to the recommended EMI/RFI cord grip accessory. For availability of the quick disconnect three-phase shielded power and motor cable contact your local sales
representative for details.

172 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Specifications Chapter 6

Electrical Ratings
Power Supply NEC Class 2
Rated Operating Voltage 24V DC (+10%, -20%)
Overvoltage Protection Reverse-polarity protected
Voltage 19.2…26.4V DC
Nominal Current 150 mA
Power 3.6 W
Unswitched Power Supply Input Current (each) ➊ 50 mA
Requirements
Maximum Current 450 mA
Maximum Power 14.4 W
Peak Inrush ➋ <5 A for 35 ms
Voltage 19.2…26.4V DC
Nominal Current 125 mA
Control Circuit
Power 3W
(External Source)
Switched Power Supply Output Current (each) ➊ 500 mA
Requirements
Maximum Current 1.625 A
Maximum Power 42 W
Peak Inrush ➋ <5 A for 35 ms
Voltage 19.2…26.4V DC
Nominal Current 275 mA
Power 6.6 W

Switched and Unswitched Number of Inputs (x 50 mA) user defined

Power Supply Requirements Number of Outputs (x 500 mA) user defined
Maximum Current 275 mA + user defined
Maximum Power 6.6 W + (24 x user defined), (60 W max.)
Peak Inrush ➋ <10 A for 35 ms
Control Circuit
An internal 50 W power supply sources 24V DC for input, outputs, and logic control.
(Internal Source)
Cat. No. Sym. Amps RMS Circuit Breaker Fuse
CC, J, or T fuse
294_-*-G1 or (-G3) 10 kA @ 480Y/277 (maximum 45 A)
UL Class fuse
294_-*-G1 or (-G3) 5 kA @ 480Y/277 (maximum 45 A)
Short Circuit Current Rating
(SCCR) When used with Allen-Bradley CC, J, or T fuse
294_-*-G1-SB 10 kA @ 480Y/277 Cat. No. 140U-D6D3-C30 (maximum 40 A)
UL Class fuse
294_-*-G1-SB 5 kA @ 480Y/277 (maximum 40 A)
CC, J, or T fuse
294_-*-G2* 10 kA @ 480Y/277 (maximum 40 A)
Type 1
Short Circuit Coordination
Size per NFPA 70 (NEC) or NFPA 79 for Group Motor Applications
➊ I/O is configurable to either input or output.
➋ Assumes zero wire resistance. Wire impedance will reduce current inrush.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 173

Chapter 6 Specifications

Input and Output Ratings

Supply Voltage Unswitched power A3/A2
Type of Inputs 24V DC current sinking
Connection Type Single keyed M12, quick disconnect
Input per Connection 1/each
Rated Operating Voltage 24V DC
On-State Input Voltage (pin 4) 10…26.4V DC, nominal 24V DC
Off-State Input Voltage 5V DC
On-State Input Current (pin 4) 1…3.7 mA, nominal 2.6 mA @ 24V DC
Input Off-State Input Current <1.5 mA
Maximum Sensor Leakage Current <2.5 mA
Maximum Number of Input Devices 6
Maximum Sensor Sourcing Current (pin 1) 50mA per point (max 300mA total for sourcing one device)
Sensor Operating Voltage Range 19.2…26V DC
Input Bounce Filter ➊
Off-On or On-Off: 0.5 ms + 64 ms
(Software Configurable)
Filtering 100 μs
DeviceLogix I/O Response 2 ms (500 Hz)
Supply Voltage (Switched Power) A1/A2
Type of Outputs DC sourcing
Load Types Resistive or light inductive
Utilization Category (IEC) DC-1, DC-13
Output State Normally Open (N.O.)
Connection Type Single keyed M12, quick disconnect
Output per Connection 1/each
Overcurrent Protection ➋ 1.5 A (the sum of all outputs cannot exceed this value)
Output
Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) UL: 1500V AC, IEC: 2000V AC
Rated Operating Voltage (Ue) 19.2…26.4V DC
Maximum Blocking Voltage 35V DC
Nominal Operating Current (Ie) 500 mA per point
Maximum Thermal Current (Ithe) 500 mA per point
Maximum Off-state Leakage Current 1 μA
Maximum Number of Outputs 6
Surge Suppression Integrated diode to protect against switching loads
➊ Input ON-to-OFF delay time is the time from a valid input signal to recognition by the module.
➋ If an output exceeds 1.5 A for greater than 7 ms, a fault is generated

174 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Specifications Chapter 6

Environmental Ratings
-20…+40°C (-4…+104°F)
Operating Temperature Range 50 °C (122 °F) without derating, when properly rated line reactors are installed
in branch circuit.
Storage and Transportation
–25...+85 °C (–13…+185 °F)
Temperature Range
Altitude 1000 m
Humidity 5…95% (non-condensing)
Pollution Degree 3
Enclosure Ratings IP66/UL Type 4/12 ➊
Approximate Shipping Weight 7.3 kg (16 lb)
➊ IP66/UL Type 4 is available with gland options G1-3. IP66/ UL Type 4/12 available with G1 and G3 gland option.

Mechanical Ratings
Operational 30 G (exceeds IEC 61800-5-1)
Resistance to Shock
Non-Operational 50 G (exceeds IEC 61800-5-1)
Operational 2.5 G, MIL-STD-810G, (exceeds IEC 61800-5-1)
Resistance to Vibration
Non-Operational 5 G, MIL-STD-810G, (exceeds IEC 61800-5-1)
Disconnect Lock Out Maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) diameter lock shackle or hasp
Disconnect LOTO Locks Up to 2 locks or hasps are supported
Disconnect Mechanical Life 200 000 operations
Power Terminals Motor Terminals Control Terminals PE/Ground Source Brake
(2) #18 …#10 AWG #18…#10 AWG (2) #18 …#10 AWG (2) #16 …#10 AWG #16 …#10 AWG
Wire Size ➊ (0.8…5.2 mm2) per (0.8…5.2 mm2) per (0.8…5.2 mm2) per (1.3…5.2 mm2) per (1.0…4.0 mm2) per
terminal terminal terminal terminal terminal
Wire Type Multi-strand copper wire
18 ± 2 lb•in 4.8 ± 2 lb•in
Tightening Torque 10.6 ± 2 lb•in (1.2 ± 0.2 N•m) (2 ± 0.2 N•m) (0.5 ± 0.2 N•m)
Wire Strip Length 0.35 ± 0.01 in. (9 ± 2 mm)
Power Rating 600V AC/25 Amp 600V AC/10 Amp 600V AC/10 Amp — 600V AC/10 Amp

Emission and Immunity Ratings

Conducted EN 55011
Radiated Class Group 2
Emission Electrostatic Discharge 4 kV contact, 8 kV air
EN 61800-3
Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field
10V/m, 80 MHz…1 GHz
2 kV (Power)
Fast Transient 2 kV (PE)
1 kV (Communication and control)
Immunity
Surge Transient 1 kV (12) L-L, 2 kV (2) L-N (earth)
Radio Frequency Conducted Disturbance 10V, 150 kHz…80 MHz
➊ When two wires used in terminal block both wires are to be of same wire AWG

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 175

Chapter 6 Specifications

Standards Compliance and Certifications

UL/CSA EN/IEC Other Agencies
EN 61800 - Adjustable Speed Electrical
Power Drive Systems, Part 3: EMC CCC (Pending)
UL 508C Power Conversion Equipment – Requirements and Specific Test Methods, KCC
Standards Compliance Suitable for Group Installation CE Marked per EMC Directive 2004/108/EC,
Part 5-1: Safety Requirements – Electrical, C-Tick
CSA C22.2, No. 14
Thermal and Energy, CE Marked per Low ODVA for EtherNet/IP and DeviceNet
Voltage Directive 2005/95/EC
Certifications cULus (File No. E207834, Guides NMMS, NMMS7)

Communication Ratings
Rated Insulation Voltage 250V
Operating Dielectric Withstand UL/NEMA: 1500V AC, IEC: 2000V AC
DeviceNet Supply Voltage Rating Range 11…25V DC, 24V DC nominal
DeviceNet Input Current 50 mA @ 24V DC
DeviceNet Input Current Surge 500 mA peak inrush
Baud Rates 125, 250, 500 kbps
500 m (1630 ft) @ 125 kbps
Distance Maximum 200 m (656 ft) @ 250 kbps
100 m (328 ft) @ 500 kbps
Auto-Baud Rate Identification Yes
"Group 2 - Slave Only" Device Type Yes
DeviceNet
Polled I/O Messaging Yes
Change of State Messaging Yes
Cyclic Messaging Yes
Explicit Messaging Yes
Full Parameter Object Support Yes
Group 4 - Off-Line Node Recovery Messaging Yes
Configuring Consistency Value Yes
Unconnected Messaging Manager (UCMN) Yes

176 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Specifications Chapter 6

Communication Ratings
EtherNet/IP ODVA - Conformance Testing EtherNet/IP Interoperability Performance – Per A9 PF 2.1
Ethernet Communication Rate 10/100 Mbps, half or full-duplex
Ethernet Ports 2 (embedded switch)
Ethernet Network Topologies Supported Star, Tree, Linear, and Ring
Device Level Ring Support Beacon Performance, IEEE 1583 Transparent Clock
Ethernet Connector M12, D code, female, with Ethernet keying, 4 Pin
Ethernet Cable Category 5e: Shielded or unshielded
IP Configuration Static, DHCP, or BootP
EtherNet/IP DHCP Timeout 30 s
Data Transported over both TCP and UDP
500 packets-per-second (2000 μs), Tx
Packet Rate (pps)
500 packets-per-second (2000 μs), Rx
Consume Instance (Command) Default of 4 words (Instance 154)
Produce Instance (Status) Default of 16 words (Instance 156)
Message Support Unicast or Multicast
Address Conflict Detection (ACD) IP v4 Address Conflict Detection for EtherNet/IP devices
Sockets 150 maximum
Security Login and password configurable
E-mail Support Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
Web Server Webpage Features Status, diagnostics, configuration
Concurrent Sessions 20
Web Server HTTP 1.1
Concurrent TCP Connections Maximum of 5 encapsulated messages over both TCP and UDP
Supports up to 2 Class 1 CIP connections [Exclusive owner (data) or
Maximum I/O Connections (CIP Class 1) listen-only]. One connection per PLC. Listen-only connection
requires a data connection to be established.
Network Connections Maximum Concurrent Explicit Messages (CIP Class 3) 6
Class 1 Connection API 2…3200 ms
Class 3 Connection API 100…10 000 ms
Request Packet Interval (RPI) 20 ms default (2 ms minimum)

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 177

Chapter 6 Specifications

Motor Overload Trip Curves

Motor overload current parameter provides class 10 overload protection.

Ambient insensitivity is inherent in the electronic design of the overload.
% of Motor Overload Current (P30)

% of Motor Overload Current (P30)

% of Motor Overload Current (P30)
No Derate Min. Derate Max. Derate
100 100 100
80 80 80
60 60 60
40 40 40
20 20 20
0 0 0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
% of Motor Nameplate Hertz (P29) % of Motor Nameplate Hertz (P29) % of Motor Nameplate Hertz (P29)

178 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Appendix A

Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT

Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit
on Industrial Machinery

Introduction Each ArmorStart LT motor controller is listed for group installation. This
appendix explains how to use this listing to apply ArmorStart LT motor
controllers in multiple-motor branch circuits according to 7.2.10.4(1) and
7.2.10.4(2) of NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery.

From the perspective of the ArmorStart LT product family, being listed for group
installation means one set of fuses or one circuit breaker may protect a branch
circuit that has two or more of these motor controllers connected to it. This
appendix refers to this type of branch circuit as a multiple-motor branch circuit.
The circuit topology shown in Figure 58, is one configuration, but not the only
possible configuration, of a multiple-motor branch circuit. In these circuits, a
single set of fuses (or a single circuit breaker) protects multiple motors, their
controllers and the circuit conductors. The motors may be any mixture of power
ratings and the controllers may be any mixture of motor controller technologies
(magnetic motor controllers and variable-frequency AC drive controllers).

This appendix addresses only NFPA 79 applications. This is not because these
products are only suitable for industrial machinery, but because industrial
machinery is their primary market. In fact, while all versions of the ArmorStart
LT products may be applied on industrial machinery, the versions that have
the Conduit Entrance Gland Plate Option may also be used in applications
governed by NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC), (see “ArmorStart LT
Product Family”).

In the 2012 Edition of NFPA 79, motor controllers that are listed for group
installation may be installed in multiple-motor branch circuits according to either
of two alternative sets of requirements. The first is found in 7.2.10.4(2), the
second in 7.2.10.4(3). The requirements of 7.2.10.4(3) are similar to those in
430.53(C) of NFPA 70, while the requirements of 7.2.10.4(2) are found only in
NFPA 79. This appendix explains the requirements of 7.2.10.4(2), rather than
those of 7.2.10.4(3), because this is the simpler method to use when applying the
ArmorStart LT family of motor controllers.

The user must determine the requirements – NFPA 79 or NFPA 70 – to use for
the application. When making this determination, it is necessary to understand
the ArmorStart LT product characteristics and useful to understand the
definition of industrial machinery. The section of this appendix, “ArmorStart LT
Product Family”, specifies whether a motor controller is suitable for installation
according to NFPA 79 or NFPA 70 (or both). The definition of industrial

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 179

Appendix A Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery

machinery is found in 3.3.56 of NFPA 79 and 670.2 of Article 670, Industrial

Machinery, in NFPA 70.

These conventions are used throughout this appendix. First, although all of the
equipment is connected to a three-phase electrical supply, all of the figures are
shown as one-line diagrams. Second, although all of the ArmorStart LT motor
controllers are listed for group installation with both fuses and a specific family
of inverse time circuit breakers, this appendix considers only fuses. This is done to
avoid repetitive explanations with minor, but necessary qualifications, for circuit
breakers. Generally, the principles for selecting the fuses also apply to selecting
inverse time circuit breakers. Third, all references unless indicated otherwise, are
to NFPA 79 – 2012.

Figure 58 - ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi-Motor Branch Circuit

Electrical Supply

Disconnecting
Means
Final
Overcurrent Single Set of Fuses
Device
NFPA 79, 3.3.10 Branch Circuit. The Circuit
Conductors Between the Final Overcurrent Device
Protecting the Circuit and the Outlet(s). [70:100]

Any Mixture of Motor Controller

Technologies
½ HP 2 HP 5 HP 5 HP 1 HP
Bulletin 294 Bulletin 294 Bulletin 291 Bulletin 290 Bulletin 294
Overload Overload Overload Overload Overload
Class 10 Class 10 Class 10/15/20 Class 10/15/20 Class 10

Nameplate* Nameplate* Nameplate* Nameplate* Nameplate*

* Each Controller is Listed for Group

Installation with Specified Maximum
Protection

1/2 Hp 2 Hp 5 Hp 5 Hp 1 Hp

Two or More Motors with any

Mixture or Power Ratings

ArmorStart LT This section contains a brief description of the attributes of the ArmorStart LT
motor controllers that are relevant to applying them in multiple-motor
Product Family branch circuits.

The term motor controller refers to the device that stops and starts the motor.
The ArmorStart LT product family consists of two types of motor controllers.
The Bulletin 290 and 291 controllers are magnetic motor controllers that use an
electromechanical contactor to stop and start the motor. The Bulletin 294 motor
controllers use a variable-frequency AC drive to stop, start and vary the speed
of the motor. This appendix refers to the Bulletin 290, 291 and 294 products as
either motor controllers or just controllers.

180 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A

Each ArmorStart LT motor controller incorporates an integrated overload relay

and motor disconnecting means. The Underwriters Laboratories’ (UL) listing
for each motor controller confirms that the motor controller — including its
integral overload relay and motor disconnecting means — is suitable for motor
group installation.

The suitability of each ArmorStart LT motor controller for installation according

to either NFPA 79 or NFPA 70 depends on the means of connecting the power
circuit wiring. All of the controllers are suitable for installation in multiple-motor
branch circuits on industrial machinery according to 7.2.10.4 of NFPA 79. The
controllers that have the Conduit Entrance Gland Plate Option are also suitable
for installation in multiple-motor branch circuits according to 430.53(C) and
430.53(D) of NFPA 70 (NEC). The controllers that have the Power Media
Gland Plate Option are suitable for installation only on industrial machinery.
These versions are limited to industrial machinery because the UL listing for the
power media connectors themselves and their matching cable assemblies covers
installation only on industrial machinery.

Multiple-Motor Branch Multiple-motor branch circuits, like that shown in Figure 58, have this
fundamental tradeoff: protecting more than one controller with a single set
Circuits and Motor of fuses requires more electrical and mechanical robustness in each controller.
Controllers Listed for Group
Installation – General In exchange for eliminating the cost and space necessary for a dedicated set of
fuses in front of each controller, the construction of each controller itself must be
more robust. For the circuit configuration shown in Figure 58 to be practical,
the ampere rating of the fuse must be large enough to operate all of the motors,
without opening, under normal starting and running conditions. This rating
of fuse must be larger than the rating permitted to protect a circuit that supplies
only a single motor and its controller. In general, as the rating of the fuse
increases, so does the magnitude of fault currents that flow until the fuse opens.
This higher magnitude of fault current results in more damage to the controller.
Therefore, the additional controller robustness is necessary to withstand these
higher fault currents, without controller damage, that could result in a shock
or fire hazard.

Consequently, to the controller, being listed for group installation mostly means
the UL testing is performed with fuses that have this practical, and higher,
ampere rating. This testing verifies that it is safe to apply this controller in a
multiple-motor branch circuit, provided the fuse is of the same class and does
not have a rating exceeding that marked on the controller.

The example in Figure 59, illustrates this increase in the maximum ampere rating
of fuse that is permitted to protect a controller. This example compares the rating
of the fuse used in the UL testing of two variable-frequency AC drive-based
motor controllers. Both controllers have a rated power of ½ horsepower and a
rated output current of 1.5 amperes. The controller shown on the left is intended
for installation in individual-motor branch circuits. The controller shown on the
right is the ArmorStart LT Bulletin 294 controller that must be listed for group

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 181

Appendix A Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery

installation to be installed, as intended, in multiple-motor branch circuits. For

this example, assume all testing is done with fuses of the same class.

The UL investigation of both controllers is done according to UL 508C, Power

Conversion Equipment. The controllers are connected to the test supply through
the three-phase conductors and equipment grounding conductor and then
covered with cotton in areas that are likely to vent hot gases and sparks during
the tests. During the test, electrical faults are impressed on the output of, and
internal to, these variable-frequency AC drive-based controllers. Increasing the
ampere rating of the fuses increases the magnitude of the fault currents that flow
through and damage the controller before the fuses open. Afterwards, the damage
to the controller is evaluated to determine whether a potential shock or fire
hazard exists when protected by fuses having this ampere rating. One criterion of
the evaluation is the examination of the equipment grounding conductor that
must not open during the test, as this could leave exposed conductive parts in an
energized state (shock hazard). Another criterion is that the cotton must not
ignite, as this indicates the expulsion from the controller of hot gases or molten
metal fragments (fire hazard).

Referring to the controller on the left, UL 508C permits the individual-motor

testing to be performed with the maximum rating of fuse that can be used to
protect an individual-motor branch circuit. According to both NFPA 70 and
NFPA 79, this is 400 percent of the full-load current rating of the largest motor
that the controller can supply. In UL 508C, this is taken to be 400 percent of the
rated output current of the controller, or 6 amperes.

Referring to the controller on the right, UL 508C permits the group installation
testing to be performed with the maximum rating of fuse that can be used to
protect a multiple-motor branch circuit. According to both NFPA 70
[430.53(C)) and NFPA 79 (7.2.10.4(3)], this is 250 amperes. This value, derived
from the installation requirements of 430.53(C) and 430.53(D) of NFPA 70, is
determined by the largest size of power conductor that the ArmorStart LT
controller can accept, 10 AWG. Because the UL 508C test covers all possibilities
in NFPA 70 and NFPA 79, it permits the maximum value of 250 amperes. This
covers 7.2.10.4(2), which permits only 100 amperes. However, in this case, the
manufacturer, Rockwell Automation, chose to test and mark with the lower value
of 45 amperes. This value was chosen as the tradeoff between the maximum
number and type of controllers in the branch circuit — limited by the maximum
fuse rating — and the electrical and mechanical robustness engineered into
each controller.

Therefore, to make its use in the multiple-motor branch circuit of Figure 58

practical, the ½ horsepower Bulletin 294 controller was engineered to be robust
enough to safely contain the damage when protected by a fuse having a rating
of 45 amperes, rather than just 6 amperes.

182 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A

Figure 59 - UL508C Variable-Frequency AC Drive Motor Controller Evaluation

Short-Circuit Test Circuit Short-Circuit Test Circuit

UL 508C – Manufacturer’s choice -

test with 6 Reduce rating for test
ampere max to 45 A Maximum
conductor size
= 10 AWG
½ HP Motor Max = 400% * Rated Output Current Max rating for 10 AWG Bulletin 294
Controller = 400% * 1.5 A = 6 A = 250 A ½ HP Motor
Controller
Max permitted rating Suitable for
Max permitted for test fuse based motor group
rating for test installation
on maximum size
Rated Output fuse based on of power conductors Rated Output
Current = 1.5 A Rated Output Current = 1.5 A

6A fuse max
Current 45 A fuse max

Maximum
conductor size
= 10 AWG

Motor Motor

Maximum Fuse Ampere This section uses Figure 60 to explain the requirements from 7.2.10.4(1) and
7.2.10.4(2) that are relevant to, and permit, the multiple-motor branch circuit
Rating According to of Figure 58.
7.2.10.4(1) and 7.2.10.4(2)
The following is the complete text of 7.2.10.4(1) and 7.2.10.4(2) and an
abbreviated version of Table 30 from the 2012 Edition of NFPA 79. The table
is abbreviated to cover the size of conductors that are generally relevant to the
ArmorStart LT motor controllers.

Complete Text -

“7.2.10.4 Two or more motors or one or more motor(s) and other load(s), and
their control equipment shall be permitted to be connected to a single branch
circuit where short-circuit and ground-fault protection is provided by a single
inverse time circuit breaker or a single set of fuses, provided the following
conditions under (1) and either (2) or (3) are met:

(1) Each motor controller and overload device is either listed for group
installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection or selected such
that the ampere rating of the motor branch short-circuit and ground-fault
protective device does not exceed that permitted by 7.2.10.1 for that individual
motor controller or overload device and corresponding motor load.

(2) The rating or setting of the branch short-circuit and ground-fault

protection device does not exceed the values in Table 30 for the smallest
conductor in the circuit.”

(3) …(not considered in this appendix)

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 183

Appendix A Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery

Table 30 - Abbreviated Table 7.2.10.4

Table 7.2.10.4 Relationship Between Conductor Size and Maximum Rating or Setting of Short-Circuit
Protective Device for Power Circuits Group Installations
Conductor Size (AWG) Maximum Rating
Fuse or Inverse Time*
Circuit Breaker
(amperes)
… …
… …
14 60
12 80
10 100
8 150
6 200
… …

The following text and Figure 60 provide an explanation of 7.2.10.4(1)

and (2). In the following, the text not relevant to Figure 58 is replaced
by ellipsis points (…). Then each individual requirement is underlined and
followed by an underlined letter in parentheses. This underlined letter in the
following text corresponds to the letter in Figure 60.

“7.2.10.4 Two or more motors (a)…and their control equipment (b) shall be
permitted to be connected to a single branch circuit (c) where short-circuit and
ground-fault protection is provided by a single inverse time circuit breaker or a
single set of fuses (d), provided the following conditions under (1) and…(2)…
are met:

(1) Each motor controller and overload device is… listed for group installation
with specified maximum branch-circuit protection (e) …

(2) The rating or setting of the branch short-circuit and ground-fault protection
device does not exceed the values in Table 7.2.10.4 for the smallest conductor
in the circuit.” (f )

Summarizing the requirements relevant to Figure 58: 7.2.10.4(1) and 7.2.10.4(2)

permit two or more ArmorStart LT motor controllers to be installed in a single
branch circuit provided (1) all the motor controllers are listed for group
installation, (2) the fuse does not exceed the maximum rating that Table 30
permits to protect the smallest conductor and (3) the fuse complies with the
maximum fuse ratings of all of the controllers.

184 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A

Figure 60 - ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi-Motor Branch Circuit

“The rating or setting of the branch short-circuit

and ground-fault protection device does
d “...a single set
of fuses…” f not exceed the values in Table 7.2.10.4
for the smallest conductor in the circuit.”
Branch circuit (shown as dotted lines) –
all of the conductors on the load side c “...shall be permitted to be connected to a single branch circuit…”
of the single set of fuses

“Suitable for Motor Group Installation”

“Each motor controller
e and overload device is ... Max. Ratings
listed for group Sym. Amps RMS 5 KA 10 KA
Fuse 45A 45A*
installation with specified
maximum branch-circuit * Type CC, J and T fuses only
protection…” ½ HP 2 HP 5 HP 5 HP 1 HP
Bulletin 294 Bulletin 294 Bulletin 291 Bulletin 290 Bulletin 294
Overload Overload Overload Overload Overload
e Class 10 Class 10 Class 10/15/20 Class 10/15/20 Class 10
Markings that satisfy
Nameplate* Nameplate* Nameplate* Nameplate* Nameplate*
7.2.10.4(1)
“... and their control
b equipment … ”

1/2 HP 2 HP 5 HP 5 HP 1 HP
FLC = FLC = FLC = FLC = FLC =
1.1 A** 3.4 A** 7.6 A** 7.6 A** 2.1 A**

a “Two or more motors ...”

* Each controller is listed for group installation with the same specified maximum protection

Explanatory Example The example addresses the overcurrent protection of the conductors, controllers
and motors. Protection for three overcurrent conditions is considered: motor
running overloads, short-circuit (line-to-line) faults, and ground-faults (line-to-
ground). The short-circuit fault and ground-fault protection is governed by
7.2.10.4(1) and 7.2.10.4(2) and explained in Requirements 1,2 and 3 and
Figure 61. The overload protection, explained in Requirement 4, is governed by
7.3.1 and 7.3.1.1. Overload coordination depends on each conductor having the
minimum ampacity given by 12.5.3 and 12.5.4. The method for determining this
minimum ampacity is explained in Requirement 5 and Figure 62.

The example branch circuit is shown in Figure 61 and Figure 62. The circuit
topology consists of a set of 10 AWG conductors that supply multiple sets of 14
AWG conductors. Each set of 14 AWG conductors supply a controller and
motor. These conductor sizes are chosen to be the smallest conductors that have
sufficient ampacity, without derating, for the loads each must carry. All of the
wiring is customer-supplied, rather than the ArmorConnect Power Media,
because all controllers have the Conduit Entrance Gland Plate Option. Fuses
protect the branch circuit.

The example addresses five basic requirements that the motor controllers, fuses
and conductors must satisfy. The letters in the circles on Figure 61 and Figure 62
are referenced in the explanations as letters in parentheses. Ellipses points (…)
are used to replace NFPA 79 text that is not applicable to the multiple-motor
branch circuit shown in Figure 61 and Figure 62. Unless indicated, all text is
from NFPA 79.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 185

Appendix A Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery

Figure 61 - ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi-Motor Branch Circuit —

Conductor and Controller Protection

Electrical Supply -
480Y/277V
Available Fault Current
Sym. Amps RMS 9 KA

Disconnecting
Means

Fuses
a
45 A Max,
Branch short-circuit
CC, J or T
and ground-fault
d protection device
Combined Load Conductors 10 AWG
Controller
ratings
further
restrict the
fuse
“Suitable for Motor Group Installation”

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG
Max. Ratings
Sym. Amps RMS 5 KA 10 KA
Fuse 45A 45A*

* Type CC, J and T fuses only ½ HP 2 HP 5 HP 5 HP 1 HP

Bulletin 294 Bulletin 294 Bulletin 291 Bulletin 290 Bulletin 294
a Overload Overload Overload Overload Overload
Class 10 Class 10 Class 10/15/20 Class 10/15/20 Class 10
Compare to
d controller max
Nameplate* Nameplate* Nameplate* Nameplate* Nameplate*
fuse ratings
b

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG
Conductor
Table 7.2.10.4
Conductor c protection
Max protection -
Fuse 60 A max, “Smallest
AWG (A) any class Determine conductor”
- - fuse class
14 60 and max
12 80 rating for
10 100 1/2 HP 2 HP 5 HP 5 HP 1 HP
conductor FLC = FLC = FLC = FLC = FLC =
8 150
- - protection 1.1 A** 3.4 A** 7.6 A** 7.6 A** 2.1 A**
7.2.10.4(2) -
“smallest
conductor in
the circuit” * Each controller is suitable for group installation with the same maximum ratings of fuse.
= 14 AWG
** Table 430.250 of NFPA 70-2011

Figure 62 - ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi-Motor Branch Circuit Minimum Conductor Ampacity

Electrical Supply
Minimum Required Ampacity (MRA)
MRA = 1.25 * Max {controller input currents} + Sum {remaining controller input currents}
Controller input currents = {I1,I2,I3,I4,I5}
Max controller input current = I3 = I4, choose I3 as Max (either is ok)
c MRA = 1.25 * I3 + (I1 + I2 + I4 + I5}
= 1.25 * 7.6 A + (1.8 A + 5.5 A + 7.6 A + 3.0 A) = 27.4 A
Combined Load Conductors 10 AWG
Min Amp. = Min Amp. = Min Amp. = Min Amp. = Min Amp. =
125% * 1.8 A 125% * 5.5 A 125% * 7.6 A a 125% * 7.6 A b 125% * 3.0 A
I1 = I2 = I3 = I4 = I5 =
14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG
1.8 A 5.5 A 7.6 A 7.6 A 3.0 A

½ HP 2 HP 5 HP 5 HP 1 HP
Bulletin Bulletin Bulletin Bulletin Bulletin
294 294 291 290 294

1.1 A 3.4 A 7.6 A 7.6 A 2.1 A

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG

14 AWG

Min Amp. = Min Amp. = Min Amp. = Min Amp. = Min Amp. =
125% * 1.1A 125% * 3.4 A 125% * 7.6 A a 125% * 7.6 A b 125% * 2.1 A

1/2 HP 2 HP 5 HP 5 HP 1 HP
FLC = FLC = FLC = FLC = FLC =
1.1 A** 3.4 A** 7.6 A** 7.6 A** 2.1 A**

** Table 430.250 of NFPA 70-2011

186 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A

1. Requirement One: Controller Ratings — The motor controllers and

overload relays must be listed for group installation with specified maximum
branch-circuit protection.

Text: “7.2.10.4(1) Each motor controller and overload device is… listed for group
installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection…”

Analysis: To apply the ArmorStart LT motor controllers in the multiple-motor

branch circuit shown in Figure 61, 7.2.10.4(1) must be satisfied; each controller
must be listed for group installation with specified maximum branch-circuit
protection. The UL listing for each ArmorStart LT motor controller confirms
that it – including its integral overload relay and motor disconnecting means — is
suitable for motor group installation with specified fuses, satisfying 7.2.10.4(1).
The Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers are listed for group installation
according to UL 508, Industrial Control Equipment. The Bulletin 294E
controllers are listed for group installation according to UL 508C, Power
Conversion Equipment.

Referring to Figure 62 (a) indicates the markings on the nameplate that satisfy
7.2.10.4(1). The marking “Suitable for Motor Group Installation” satisfies the
requirement to be listed for group installation. The ratings located beneath the
description “Max. Ratings” are the specified maximum branch circuit protection.
The (a) beside the fuse(s) indicates that the maximum protection specified on the
nameplate applies to these fuse(s).

2. Requirement Two: Conductor Short-circuit and Ground-Fault

Protection — The fuse must protect the conductors for short-circuit faults
and ground faults.

Text: “7.2.10.4(2) The rating or setting of the branch short-circuit and ground-
fault protection device does not exceed the values in Table 30 for the smallest
conductor in the circuit.”

Analysis: Referring to Figure 61, 7.2.10.4(2) must be satisfied. The fuse, as

indicated by the description in Figure 61 (a), is the branch short-circuit and
ground-fault protection device. The word circuit means the branch circuit.
The conductors of the branch circuit start at the load side of the fuses and end
at the input to the motor, including the conductors between the motor
controllers and the motor. The smallest conductor in the circuit is any one
of the 14 AWG conductors that supply each controller and motor. The note
at (b) indicates the conductor protection is based on the smallest conductor,
14 AWG. Referring to Table 30 a 14 AWG conductor may be used in a circuit
that is protected by a fuse of any class having a rating of 60 amperes or less (c).
Therefore, selecting a fuse of any class with a maximum rating of 60 amperes
satisfies the conductor protection requirement of 7.2.10.4(2).

Supplementary Note 1: The value specified in Table 30 is the maximum rating

of fuse that 7.2.10.4(2) permits to protect that size of conductor. The rating of
the fuse may be set to the maximum value given by Table 30 for the smallest
conductor without further justification. However, if any controller, or other
component, has a maximum rating of fuse that is less than the Table 30 value, the

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 187

Appendix A Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery

maximum rating of the fuse protecting the branch circuit must be reduced to the
lower value so that all components are applied according to their ratings. For
example, as shown in Requirement Three, a lower value may be necessary to
protect the motor controller within its ratings because its specified maximum
protection is less than the rating that Table 30 permits for the smallest circuit
conductor. Another reason to use a lower rating of fuse is to provide more
conservative conductor and controller protection. However, in all cases it is
important to ensure the ampere rating is sufficient to start and operate the motors
without nuisance opening of the fuse(s).

Supplementary Note 2: The note at (b) points to the conductor on the output
of the ½ Hp Bulletin 294E controller in order to emphasize that the smallest
conductor in the circuit includes the conductors between each controller and
motor. This includes the output of the variable-frequency AC drive-based
Bulletin 294E controllers; even though these drives have electronic short-circuit
protection. According to NFPA 79, the fuse, and not the drive’s electronic short-
circuit protection, provides the short-circuit fault and ground-fault protection
for these output conductors.

Supplementary Note 3: Generally, connecting a smaller conductor to a larger

conductor requires the installation of fuses at the connection. This connection
may be made without this fuse, in some cases, through the use of a tap rule that
indirectly protects the smaller conductor by limiting two things: the ratio of the
ampacity of the larger conductor to the ampacity of the smaller conductor and
the maximum length of the smaller conductor (see, for example, 7.2.8.2). When
applying 7.2.10.4(2), such a tap rule is neither applicable nor necessary. In
Figure 61, the smaller 14 AWG conductors may be connected to combined load
conductors of any size because 7.2.10.4 does not indirectly protect the smaller
conductor by limiting the ratio of the larger to smaller conductor ampacities and
the conductor length. Instead, Table 30 protects the smallest conductor directly
by specifying the maximum rating of fuse that may protect a branch circuit that
contains a conductor of that size.

3. Requirement Three: Controller Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault

Protection — Each motor controller must be protected according to its own
ratings, that is, applied in accordance with its listing.

Text: “(1) Each motor controller and overload device is… listed for group
installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection…”

Analysis: See (d) in Figure 61. The characteristics of the fuse(s) permitted to
protect the conductors (see Requirement 2) must now be compared to those in
the controller’s ratings. To comply with the listing of each motor controller and
overload relay, the fuse(s) must comply with the maximum branch-circuit
protection specified in the controller markings. Therefore, the fuse(s) must be
of a class marked on all of the controllers and the rating of the fuse(s) must not
exceed the rating marked on any of the controllers. The markings of each
controller specify that a fuse having a maximum rating of 45 A may protect the
motor controller. When connecting to an electrical supply having an available
fault current of 5000 amperes or less, the class of the fuse is not specified and may
be any class. When connecting to an electrical supply having an available fault

188 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A

current between 5000 and 10000 amperes, the class of the fuse must be CC, J
or T. Since the electrical supply has an available fault current of 9000 amperes,
selecting a Class CC, J or T fuse with a rating of 45 A or less ensures each motor
controller is applied within its own ratings.

Supplementary Note 1: The rating of the fuse must not exceed the rating
permitted by 7.2.10.4(2) to protect the smallest conductor in the circuit.
Selecting a Class CC, J or T fuse with a rating of 45 amperes, being less than 60
amperes, also protects the conductors (see Requirement 2). Although the
ArmorStart LT products presently have a maximum fuse rating of 45 A, future
controllers may have maximum fuse ratings that exceed 60 A. In this case, the
maximum rating of fuse is limited by the rating to protect the 14 AWG
conductors, 60 A. The maximum rating permitted for the controller, 45 A,
is a maximum rating and can be reduced, for more conservative protection,
provided nuisance opening of the fuses do not occur.

Supplementary Note 2: In this appendix, a fuse having a rating of any class

means a fuse having the let-through characteristics of an Class RK-5 fuse. Class
RK-5 fuses are assumed to have the maximum let-through of any class of fuse. For
this reason, the ArmorStart LT motor controllers that are marked for use with
fuses, without a restriction to a particular class, have been tested with and are
intended to be used with fuses having a class of RK-5. Of course, fuses of a class
that have lower let-throughs than Class RK-5, such as Class CC, J or T, are also
acceptable. A fuse having a rating of any class also restricts the fuse to those that
have been evaluated for use as branch-circuit protection devices. This means that
semiconductor fuses, used to protect power electronic equipment, or
supplemental fuses cannot be used to protect the multiple-motor branch circuit.

Supplementary Note 3: There are four complementary ratings relevant to the

“specified maximum branch-circuit protection” of 7.2.10.4(1). They are: the fuse
class, the maximum fuse rating, the voltage rating and connection of the source
(480Y/277 V), and the available fault current of the source. Applying the
controllers according to these four ratings means that a fault on the output of all
the controllers, and internal faults for Bulletin 294 controllers, will not result in a
shock or fire hazard.

Supplementary Note 4: In this example, the assumption is made that the

available fault current at the controller is that of the source on the line side
of the fuses. Although it is true that the wiring impedance between the fuses
and the first controller reduce the fault current available at the controllers, this
reduction is neglected by assuming the first controller, the ½ horsepower
Bulletin 294 controller, is very close to the fuses.

4. Requirement Four: Overload Protection — The motors, conductors and

controllers must be protected against motor overload conditions.

Text:

“7.3.1 General. Overload devices shall be provided to protect each motor, motor
controller, and branch-circuit conductor against excessive heating due to motor
overloads or failure to start.”

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 189

Appendix A Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery

“7.3.1.1 Motors. Motor overload protection shall be provided in accordance with

Article 430, Part III, of NFPA 70.”

Analysis: Each ArmorStart LT motor controller incorporates an integral

overload relay. This overload function must be set in accordance with Article 430,
Part III of NFPA 70. Selecting the ampacity of the circuit conductors
appropriately (see Requirement 5) ensures the overload relays, when set
according to 7.3.1.1, will protect the conductors against overheating due
to motor overloads.

Supplementary Note: Each individual controller overload relay directly protects

the conductors connected to the input and output of that controller and the
motor that the controller supplies. The combined load conductor is protected by
the tripping of one or more of the controller overload relays, which remove(s) the
overloaded motor(s) before the combined load conductor overheats.

5. Requirement: Conductor Ampacity —The minimum ampacity

of conductors.

Text:

“12.5.3 Motor circuit conductors supplying a single motor shall have an ampacity
not less than 125 percent of the motor full-load current rating.”

“12.5.4 Combined load conductors shall have an ampacity not less than … 125
percent of the full-load current rating of the highest rated motor plus the sum of
the full-load current ratings of all other connected motors…”

Analysis: Referring to Figure 62, (a), (b) and (c) explain the method for
calculating the minimum required conductor ampacity for each of these
conductors: input and output conductors of Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers
(a), input and output conductors of Bulletin 294E controllers (b) and combined
load conductors that supply Bulletin 290E, 291E and 294E controllers (c). The
currents I1 through I5 are the input currents to the controllers. For the Bulletin
290E and 291E controllers, these are the same as the output motor currents. For
the Bulletin 294E controllers, these currents are the rated input currents.

The example does not address conditions of use such as an ambient temperature
exceeding 30 °C or more than three current-carrying conductors in a cable or
raceway. In a particular application, these conditions of use may require derating
of the ampacity given in Table 12.5.1. This example assumes that, under the
conditions of use, both conductors have sufficient ampacity for the application.
This means the 14 AWG conductors have an ampacity of no less than
9.5 A and the 10 AWG conductors have an ampacity of no less than
27.4 A.

190 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery Appendix A

Input and Output Conductors For Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers, which use an electromechanical
contactor to control the motor, the input current, like the output current, is just
of Bulletin 290E and 291E the current to the motor. Therefore, the minimum conductor ampacity for both
Controllers (a) input and output conductors is 125 percent of the motor full-load current rating,
as specified in the text of 12.5.3 (a).

Referring to Figure 62, the full-load current rating of a three-phase, 460 V, 5 Hp

induction motor is 7.6 amperes. Using this value, both the input and output
conductors must have an ampacity that is not less than 125% of 7.6 A or 9.5 A.

Input and Output Conductors The Bulletin 294E controllers use a variable-frequency AC drive to control the
motor. These drives use a power conversion method that generates input currents
of Bulletin 294E Controllers that are larger than the output currents. The input currents are larger because,
(b) unlike the output currents to the motor, they are not sinusoidal. Consequently,
when determining the minimum ampacity of the input conductors, the
requirement of 12.5.3 must be based on the rated input current of the controller,
rather than the full-load current rating of the motor. Therefore, the minimum
ampacity of the input conductors must be 125% of the controller rated input
current, while that of the output conductors must be 125% of the motor full-load
current rating.

Referring to Figure 62, the 1 Hp Bulletin 294E controller has a rated input
current of 3.0 amperes. Using the rated input current, the conductors from the
combined load conductors to the controllers must have an ampacity of 125%
of 3.0 A or 3.75 A. The output conductors must have an ampacity of 125% of
2.1 A or 2.6 A.

Combined Load Conductors The requirement for the minimum ampacity of the combined load conductors
is given by 12.5.4. When the combined load conductors supply one or more
(c) Bulletin 294E controllers, the minimum ampacity calculation of 12.5.4 must
be made by substituting the rated input current of the Bulletin 294E controllers
for the full-load current rating of the motors that these controllers supply.

In Figure 62, the currents I1, I2, I3, I4 and I5 are the input currents to each
controller. I3 and I4 are the full-load current ratings of the 5 Hp motors. I1, I2
and I5 are the rated input currents of the Bulletin 294E controllers. Referring to
the explanatory text (c) in Figure 62, the method for calculating the minimum
ampacity of the combined load conductors follows: first, multiply the largest
input current to any controller – Bulletin 290E, 291E or 294E - by 125%. In this
case, the input currents to the Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers, I3 and I4, are
the largest, 7.6 A. Because they are the same, either can be used. Choose I3 to
calculate 125% of the maximum. 125% of 7.6 A is 9.5 A. Second, sum the
remaining input currents (I1, I2, I4, I5) for a total of 17.9 A. Third, add the result
from the first step to the result from the second for a total of 27.4 A. Finally, the
minimum ampacity of the combined load conductors is 27.4 A.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 191

Appendix A Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery

Supplementary Note 1: The input currents to the Bulletin 294E motor

controllers are larger than the output currents to the motor because the input
currents contain harmonics resulting from the power conversion process.
This harmonic content and the magnitude of the resulting non-sinusoidal input
currents depend on the impedance of the electrical supply. The value specified
for the rated input current is the maximum value over the range of possible supply
impedances. For this reason, the magnitude of current measured on a particular
electrical system may be less than the specified value.

192 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Appendix B

CIP Information

High Level Product The ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP is an extension of the ArmorStart LT

DeviceNet. Three product types offered:
Description
Table 31 - ArmorStart LT Distributed Starter Type
Bulletin Number Distributed Starter Type
290E DOL
291E Reversing
294E V/Hz

Product Codes and Name Strings

The following table lists the product codes and name strings that will be added to
the ArmorStart LT product family for EtherNet/IP.
Table 32 - Product Codes and Name Strings
Product Current Integrated
Code Rating Identity Object Name String Power Supply
0x301 0.24…3.5 amps ArmorStart 290E 0.24…3.5 A No
0x302 1.1…7.6 amps ArmorStart 290E 1.1…7.6 A No
0x311 0.24…3.5 amps ArmorStart 290EP 0.24…3.5 A Yes
0x312 1.1…7.6 amps ArmorStart 290EP 1.1…7.6 A Yes
0x341 0.24…3.5 amps ArmorStart 291E 0.24…3.5 A No
0x342 1.1…7.6 amps ArmorStart 291E 1.1…7.6 A No
0x351 0.24…3.5 amps ArmorStart 291EP 0.24…3.5 A Yes
0x352 1.1…7.6 amps ArmorStart 291EP 1.1…7.6 A Yes
0x3C2 0.5…2.5 amps ArmorStart 294E 0.5 Hp No
0x3C4 1.1…5.5 amps ArmorStart 294E 1.0 Hp No
0x3C6 3.2…16 amps ArmorStart 294E 2.0 Hp No
0x3D2 0.5…2.5 amps ArmorStart 294EP 0.5 Hp Yes
0x3D4 1.1…5.5 amps ArmorStart 294EP 1.0 Hp Yes
0x3D6 3.2…16 amps ArmorStart 294EP 2.0 Hp Yes

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 193

Appendix B CIP Information

CIP Explicit Connection The ArmorStart LT allows run, jog and user outputs to be driven by connected
explicit messages when no I/O connection exists, or when a I/O connection
Behavior exists in the idle state. a single EtherNet/IP Class 3 explicit connection will be
allowed to send “explicit control” messages via an “Active Explicit” connection.
An EtherNet/IP Class 3 explicit connection becomes the “explicit control”
connection when it becomes the first EtherNet/IP Class 3 explicit connection to
send a “set” service to one of the following:

• The “value” attribute of any Discrete Output Point (DOP) instance (Class
Code 0x09).

• The “data” attribute of any output (consumed) Assembly instance (Class

Code 0x04).

• Attribute 3 or 4 of the Control Supervisor Object (Class Code 0x29).

EDS Files

The information contained in the EDS (Electronic Data Sheet) files for
ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP can be extracted via the network.

CIP Object Requirements The following CIP objects will be covered in the following subsections:

For convenience, all objects that are accessible via the EtherNet/IP port are
included.

Class Object
0x0001 Identity Object
0x0002 Message Router
0x0004 Assembly Object
0x0006 Connection Manager Object
0x0008 Discrete Input Point Object
0x0009 Discrete Output Point Object
0x000A Analog Input Point
0x000B Analog Output Point
0x000F Parameter Object
0x0010 Parameter Group Object
0x001D Discrete Input Group Object
0x001E Discrete Output Group Object
0x0029 Control Supervisor
0x002C Overload Object
0x0047 Device Level Ring Object
0x0097 DPI Fault Object
0x098 Alarm Object

194 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 CIP Information Appendix B

Class Object
0x00F5 TCP/IP Interface Object
0x00F6 Ethernet Link Object
0x0376 Trip and Warning Email Object
0x032F Email Object

Identity Object CLASS CODE 0x0001

The following class attributes are supported for the Identity Object:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT 1
2 Get Max Instance UINT 2 for Bulletin 290E/291E and 3 for Bulletin 294E

Two instances of the Identity Object will be supported for Bulletin 290E and Bulletin
291E; 3 for Bulletin 294E. The following table shows what each instance will represent.

Instance Name Revision Attribute

1 Main Control Board The firmware rev of the main control board operating system
3 PowerFlex 4M (Bulletin 294E only) The firmware revision of the PowerFlex 4M

Each instance of the Identity Object will contain the following attributes:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Vendor UINT 1
2 Get Device Type UINT 22
3➊ Get Product Code UINT Product Code specific.
Revision Structure of:
4 Get Major Revision USINT
Minor Revision USINT
Bit 0 - 0 = Not Owned; 1 = Owned by Master
Bit 2 - 0 = Factory Defaulted; 1 = Configured
Bits 4-7 – Extended Status (see table below)
5 Get Status WORD Bit 8 - Minor Recoverable fault
Bit 9 - Minor Unrecoverable fault
Bit 10 - Major Recoverable fault
Bit 11 - Major Unrecoverable fault
6 Get Serial Number UDINT Unique number for each device
Product Name Structure of:
7➊ Get String Length USINT Product Code specific
ASCII String STRING
8 Get State USINT Returns the value 3 = Operational
Configuration UINT Unique value depending on output of the parameter
9 Get Consistency Value checksum algorithm.
102 Get Build UDINT Firmware Build Number

➊ See product code definitions in Table 32, Product Codes and Name Strings.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 195

Appendix B CIP Information

Extended Device Status Field (bits 4-7) in “Status” Instance Attribute 5 on

previous page

Value Description
0 Self-testing or unknown
1 Firmware update in progress
2 At least one faulted I/O connection
3 No I/O connections established
4 Non-volatile configuration bad
5 Major fault – either bit 10 or bit 11 is true (1)
6 At least one I/O connection in run mode
7 At least one I/O connection established, all in idle mode

The following common services will be implemented for the Identity Object:

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x01 Yes Yes Get_Attributes_All
0x05 No Yes Reset
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attributes_Single

Message Router CLASS CODE 0x0002

No class or instance attributes will be supported. The message router object exists
only to route explicit messages to other objects.

Assembly Object CLASS CODE 0x0004

The following class attribute is supported for the Assembly Object:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT 2

The following static Assembly instance attributes will be supported for each
Assembly instance:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Number of Members in Member List UINT —
Member List Array of STRUCT Array of CIP paths
Member Data Description UINT Size of Member Data in bits
2 Get Member Path Size UINT Size of Member Path in bytes
Member Path Packed Member EPATHs for each assembly instance
EPATH

196 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 CIP Information Appendix B

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

3 Conditional Data Array of BYTE —
4 Get Size UINT Number of bytes in attribute 3
100 Get Name String STRING —

The following services will be implemented for the Assembly Object:

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

I/O Assemblies

The following table summarizes the Assembly instances that are supported in the
ArmrorStart EtherNet/IP product:

Instance Type Description

3 Consumed Required ODVA Consumed Instance
52 Produced Required ODVA Produced Instance
100 Config Configuration Assembly for Bulletin 290E/291E Starters
101 Config Configuration Assembly for Bulletin 294E Starters
150 Consumed Default Consumed Instance for Bulletin 290E/291E units
152 Produced Exhaustive Produced Status Assembly Instance
154 Consumed Default Consumed Instance for Inverter type (Bulletin 294E) units
156 Produced Exhaustive Produced Drive Status Assembly Instance

Instance 3

Instance 3 is the required output (consumed) assembly.

Instance 3 "ODVA Cmd"

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 — — — — — — — Run Forward

Instance 52

Instance 52 is the required input (produced) assembly.

Instance 52 "ODVA Status"

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
— — — — — — RunningForward — TripPresent

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 197

Appendix B CIP Information

Instance 100

Instance 100 is the Configuration Assembly for Bulletin 290E and 291E units.

Instance 100 for Bulletin 290E/291E Starters

Member Index Byte Offset Name Parameter Instance
0 0 Reserved for Logix N/A
1 2 AssemblyRevision N/A
2 4 FLASetting 28
3 6 OLResetLevel 29
4 8 OverloadClass 30
5 10 ProtFltResetMode 41
6 12 ProtectFltEnable 42
7 14 WarningEnable 43
8 16 RunNetFltAction 45
9 18 RunNetFltValue 46
10 20 RunNetIdleAction 47
11 22 RunNetIdleValue 48
12 24 IOPointConfigure 49
13 26 FilterOffOn 50
14 28 FilterOnOff 51
15 30 OutProtFltState 52
16 32 OutProtFltValue 53
17 34 OutNetFltState 54
18 36 OutNetFltValue 55
19 38 OutNetIdleState 56
20 40 OutNetIdleValue 57
21 42 Input00Function 58
22 44 Input01Function 59
23 46 Input02Function 60
24 48 Input03Function 61
25 50 Input04Function 62
26 52 Input05Function 63
27 54 NetworkOverride 64
28 56 CommOverride 65
29 58 KeypadMode 66
30 60 KeypadDisable 67
31 62 OLWarningLevel 69
32 64 JamInhibitTime 70
33 66 JamTripDeley 71
34 68 JamTripLevel 72
35 70 JamWarningLevel 73

198 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 CIP Information Appendix B

Instance 100 for Bulletin 290E/291E Starters

Member Index Byte Offset Name Parameter Instance
36 72 StallEnableTime 74
37 74 StallTripLevel 75
38 76 ULInhibitTime 76
39 78 ULTripDelay 77
40 80 ULTripLevel 78
41 82 ULWarnLevel 79

Instance 101

Instance 101 is the Configuration Assembly for Bulletin 294E units.

Instance 101 for Bulletin 294E Starters

Member Index Byte Offset Name Parameter Instance
0 0 AssemblyRevision N/A
1 2 AssemblyRevision N/A
2 4 MotorNPVolts 28
3 6 MotorNPHertz 29
4 8 MotorOLCurrent 30
5 10 CurrentLimit 31
6 12 StopMode 32
7 14 SpeedReference 33
8 16 MinimumFreq 34
9 18 MaximumFreq 35
10 20 AccelTime1 36
11 22 DecelTime1 37
12 24 SCurvePercent 38
13 26 JogFrequency 39
14 28 JogAccelDecel 40
15 30 ProtFltResetMode 41
16 32 ProtectFltEnable 42
17 34 WarningEnable 43
18 36 RunNetFltAction 45
19 38 RunNetFaultValue 46
20 40 RunNetIdleAction 47
21 42 RunNetIdleValue 48
22 44 IOPointConfigure 49
23 46 FilterOffOn 50
24 48 FilterOnOff 51
25 50 OutProtFltState 52
26 52 OutProtFltValue 53

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 199

Appendix B CIP Information

Instance 101 for Bulletin 294E Starters

Member Index Byte Offset Name Parameter Instance
27 54 OutNetFaultState 54
28 56 OutNetFaultValue 55
29 58 OutNetIdleState 56
30 60 OutNetIdleValue 57
31 62 Input00Function 58
32 64 Input01Function 59
33 66 Input02Function 60
34 68 Input03Function 61
35 70 Input04Function 62
36 72 Input05Function 63
37 74 NetworkOverride 64
38 76 CommOverride 65
39 78 KeypadMode 66
40 80 KeypadDisable 67
41 82 AccelTime2 69
42 84 DecelTime2 70
43 86 MotorOLRetention 71
44 88 InternalFreq 72
45 90 SkipFrequency 73
46 92 SkipFreqBand 74
47 94 DCBrakeTime 75
48 96 DCBrakeLevel 76
49 98 ReverseDisable 77
50 100 FlytingStartEna 78
51 102 Compensation 79
52 104 SlipHertzAtFLA 80
53 106 BusRegulateMode 81
54 108 MotorOLSelect 82
55 110 SWCurrentTrip 83
56 112 AutoRestartTries 84
57 114 AutoRestartDelay 85
58 116 BoostSelect 86
59 118 MaximumVoltage 87
60 120 MotorNamPlateFLA 88
61 122 BrakeMode 89
62 124 BrkFreqThresh 90
63 126 BrkCurrThresh 91

200 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 CIP Information Appendix B

Instance 150

Instance 150 is the default Output (Consumed) Assembly for Bulletin 290E/
291E starters.

Instance 150 "Starter Cmd" – DeviceLogix Consumed Assembly for Bulletin 290E/291E Starters
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 — — — — — ResetFault RunReverse RunForward
1 — — Out05 Out04 Out03 Out02 Out01 Out00
2 Pt07DeviceIn Pt06DeviceIn Pt05DeviceIn Pt04DeviceIn Pt03DeviceIn Pt02DeviceIn Pt01DeviceIn Pt00DeviceIn
3 Pt15DeviceIn Pt14DeviceIn Pt13DeviceIn Pt12DeviceIn Pt11DeviceIn Pt10DeviceIn Pt09DeviceIn Pt08DeviceIn
4 AnalogDeviceIn (low byte)
5 AnalogDeviceIn (high Byte)

Instance 152

Instance 152 is the Exhaustive Starter Status Assembly for Bulletin 290E/291E
starters.

Instance 152 "Starter Stat" – DeviceLogix Produced Assembly for Bulletin 290E/291E Starters
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 Reserved
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 CurrentFlowing NetControlStatus Ready RunningReverse RunningForward WarningPresent TripPresent
5 DisconnectClosed KeyPadHand KeyPadOff KeyPadAuto DLXEnabled
6 Pt05 Pt04 Pt03 Pt02 Pt01 Pt00
7
8 Pt07DeviceOut Pt06DeviceOut Pt05DeviceOut Pt04DeviceOut Pt03DeviceOut Pt02DeviceOut Pt01DeviceOut Pt00DeviceOut
9 Pt15DeviceOut Pt14DeviceOut Pt13DeviceOut Pt12DeviceOut Pt11DeviceOut Pt10DeviceOut Pt09DeviceOut Pt08DeviceOut
10 An00DeviceOut (low byte)
11 An00DeviceOut (high byte)
12
Parameter 1 – PhaseL1Current
13
14
Parameter 2 – PhaseL2Current
15
16
Parameter 3 – PhaseL3Current
17
18
Parameter 4 – AverageCurrent
19
20
Parameter 5 – %ThermalUtilized
21

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 201

Appendix B CIP Information

Instance 152 "Starter Stat" – DeviceLogix Produced Assembly for Bulletin 290E/291E Starters
22 Parameter 11 – SwitchedVolts
23 OutputSourceV (IPS units)

24 Parameter 12 – UnswitchedVolts
25 SensorSourceV (IPS units)

26
Parameter 16 – TripStatus
27
28
Parameter 17 – WarningStstus
29

Instance 154

Instance 154 is the default Output (Consumed) Assembly for Inverter type
(Bulletin 294E) Distributed Starters.

Instance 154 "Drive Cmd" – DeviceLogix Consumed Assembly for Bulletin 294E Starters
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 JogReverse JogForward ResetFault RunReverse RunFoward
1 Decel2 Accel2 Out05 Out04 Out03 Out02 Out01 Out00
2 CommandFreq (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
3 CommandFreq (High) (xxx.x Hz)
4 Pt07DeviceIn Pt06DeviceIn Pt05DeviceIn Pt04DeviceIn Pt03DeviceIn Pt02DeviceIn Pt01DeviceIn Pt00DeviceIn
5 Pt15DeviceIn Pt14DeviceIn Pt13DeviceIn Pt12DeviceIn Pt11DeviceIn Pt10DeviceIn Pt09DeviceIn Pt08DeviceIn
6 An00DeviceIn (lowbyte)
7 An00DeviceIn (highbyte)

Instance 156

Instance 156 is the Exhaustive Drive Status Assembly Instance

Instance 156 "Drive Status" – Produced Assembly for Bulletin 294E Starters
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 Reserved
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 AtReference NetRefStatus NetControlStatus Ready RunningReverse RunningForward WarningPresent TripPresent
5 BrakeStatus DisconnectClosed KeyPadJogging KeyPadHand KeyPadOff KeyPadAuto DLXEnabled
6 Output Frequency (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
7 Output Frequency (High) (xxx.x Hz)
8 Pt05 Pt04 Pt03 Pt02 Pt01 Pt00
9
10 Pt07DeviceOut Pt06DeviceOut Pt05DeviceOut Pt04DeviceOut Pt03DeviceOut Pt02DeviceOut Pt01DeviceOut Pt00DeviceOut

202 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 CIP Information Appendix B

Instance 156 "Drive Status" – Produced Assembly for Bulletin 294E Starters
11 Pt15DeviceOut Pt14DeviceOut Pt13DeviceOut Pt12DeviceOut Pt11DeviceOut Pt10DeviceOut Pt09DeviceOut Pt08DeviceOut
12 An00DeviceOut (low byte)
13 An00DeviceOut (high byte)
14
Parameter 3 – OutputCurrent
15
16
Parameter 4 – OutputVoltage
17
18
Parameter 5 – DCBusVoltage
19
20 Parameter 11 – SwitchedVolts
21 OutputSourceV (IPS units)

22 Parameter 12 – UnswitchedVolts
23 SensorSourceV (IPS units)

24
Parameter 13 – InternalFanRPM
25
26
Parameter 14 – ElaspedRunTime
27
28
Parameter 15 – DriveTemperature
29
30
Parameter 16 – TripStatus
31
32
Parameter 17 – WarningStatus
33

Connection Manager Object CLASS CODE 0x0006

No class attributes will be supported for the Connection Manager Object.

One Instance of the Connection Manager Object will be supported. It has the
following attributes:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Set Open Requests UINT Number of Forward Open service requests received
2 Set Open Format Rejects UINT Number of Forward Open service requests which were rejected
due to bad format
3 Set Open Resource Rejects UINT Number of Forward Open service requests which were rejected
due to lack of resources
4 Set Open Other Rejects UINT Number of Forward Open service requests rejected for reasons
other than bad format or lack of resources.
5 Set Close Requests UINT Number of Forward Close service requests received
6 Set Close Format Requests UINT Number of Forward Close service requests which were rejected
due to bad format

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 203

Appendix B CIP Information

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

7 Set Close Other Requests UINT Number of Forward Close service requests which were rejected
for reasons other than bad format
8 Set Connection Timeouts UINT Total number of connection timeouts that have occurred
9 Get Connection Entry Lists Struct of
NumConnEntries UINT Number of connection entries. This attribute, divided by 8 and
rounded up for any remainder, gives the length of the array (in
bytes) of the ConnOpenBits field of this structure.
ConnOpenBits Array of BOOL List of connections. Each bit represents a possible connection.
11 Get CPU_Utilization UINT CPU Utilization in tenths of a percent
12 Get MaxBuffSize UDINT Amount of buffer space (in bytes) originally available
13 Get BufSize Remaining UDINT Amount of buffer space (in bytes) available at this time

Class 1 Connections

Class 1 connections are used to transfer I/O data, and can be established to the
assembly object instances. Each Class 1 connection establishes two data
transports, one consuming and one producing. The heartbeat instances are used
for connections that shall access only inputs. Class 1 uses UDP transport.

• Total numbers of supported Class 1 connections equals 4

(Total for: exclusive owner + input only + listen only)

• Supported API: 2…3200 ms

• T->O Connection type: Point-to-point, multicast

• O->T Connection type: Point-to-point

• Supported trigger type: Cyclic, Change-of-state

When all supported connections are used the error code “Connection Manager
cannot support any more connections” shall be returned.

Exclusive Owner Connection

This connection type is used for controlling the outputs of the module and shall
not be dependent on any other connection. Only one exclusive owner connection
can be opened against the module.

If an exclusive owner connection is already opened “Connection in Use” (General

Status = 0x01, Extend Status = 0x0100) shall be returned an error code.

• Connection point O -> T shall be Assembly object, Instance 3, 150, or 154

• Connection point T -> O shall be Assembly object, Instance 52, 152, or

156

204 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 CIP Information Appendix B

Input Only Connection

This connection is used to read data from the module without controlling the
outputs. This connection type shall not be dependent on any other connection. It
is recommended that the originator sets the data size in the O->T direction of the
Forward_Open be zero, there are however no check that this is actually the case.

IMPORTANT If an exclusive owner connection has been opened against the module and
times out, the input only connection shall time out as well. If the exclusive
owner connection is properly closed, the input only connection shall not be
affected.

• Number of supported input only connections equals four (shared with

exclusive owner and listen only connection).

Listen Only Connection

This connection is dependent on another connection to exist. If that connection

(Exclusive owner or Input only) is closed, the listen only connection shall be
closed as well.

It is recommended that the originator sets the data size in the O->T direction of
the Forward_Open be zero, there are however no checks that this is actually the
case.

If no other connection exists when listen only tries to be opened, a “Controlling

connection not open (general status = 0x01, extend status = 0x0119)” error
message shall be sent.

• Number of supported listen only connections equals four (shared with

exclusive owner and input only connection).

Class 3 Connections

Explicit Message Connection

Class 3 connections are used to establish connections to the message router.

Thereafter the connection is used for explicit messaging. Class 3 connections use
TCP connections.
• 16 concurrent Class 3 connections will be supported

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x01 No Yes Get_Attribute_All
0x0e No Yes Get_Attribute_Single

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 205

Appendix B CIP Information

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single
0x4E No Yes Forward_Close
0x54 No Yes Forward_Open

Discrete Input Point CLASS CODE 0x0008

Object
The following class attributes are currently supported for the Discrete Input
Point Object:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT 2
2 Get Max Instance UINT 6

Six instances of the Discrete Input Point Object are supported. All instances
contain the following attributes:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

3 Get Value BOOL 0 = OFF, 1 = ON
4 Get Fault Status BOOL 0 = OK, 1 = Fault
115 Get/Set Force Enable BOOL 0 = Disable, 1 = Enable
116 Get/Set Force Value BOOL 0 = OFF, 1 = ON

The following common services will be implemented for the Discrete Input Point
Object:

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

Discrete Output Point CLASS CODE 0x0009

Object
The following class attributes are supported:
fo

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT 1
2 Get Max Instance UINT 8 for Bulletin 290E/291E, 10 for Bulletin 294E

206 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 CIP Information Appendix B

Eight instances of the Discrete Output Point Object are supported for DOL/
Reverser (Bulletin 290E/291E) units. Ten instances are supported for Drive
(Bulletin 294E) units. The following table summarizes the DOP (Bulletin 290E/
291E) instances:

Instance Name Alternate Mapping Description

1 Run Fwd Output 0029-01-03 Run Forward output.
2 Run Rev Output 0029-01-04 Run Reverse output.
3 User Output A None
4 User Output B None
5 User Output C None These are the six ArmorStart LT user outputs for all starter types. Their fault/
6 User Output D None idle behavior is defined in DOP Instance 3.

7 User Output E None

8 User Output F None
9 Drive Jog Fwd None
This instances exists for Inverter (Bulletin 294E) units only.
10 Drive Jog Rev None

All instances contain the following attribute:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

3 Get Value BOOL 0 = OFF, 1 = ON

The following common services will be implemented for the Discrete Output
Point Object:

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

Discrete Output Point Object Special Requirements

There are many sources that can affect an output point's value: an I/O message,
an explicit message, local logic, network fault and idle conditions, and protection
fault conditions. An output point must know how to select which source of data
to use to drive its value attribute.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 207

Appendix B CIP Information

The following state transition diagram is used for an unbound Bulletin 290E

Figure 63 - State Transition for Unbound Bulletin 290E

Non-Existent
Power off
Power up

Connection Available
Transitions to
Protection Fault
Established

DNet Fault
Idle DNet Fault
Ready Protection
Connection Transitions to Established Fault

DNet Fault
DNet
Idle
Protection Fault Reset
Ready Protection
Protection Fault Fault
Receive
Data

Protection Fault
Receive Idle Run
DNet Fault

208 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 CIP Information Appendix B

The following flow chart illustrates the behavior of Bound DOPs

Figure 64 - State Transition for Bound Bulletin 290E

Yes Pr Fault
Protection Action = Ignore
Fault

Yes

Unrecoverable Yes Network

Network Fault
Fault Override

Return Object State Yes Yes

Conflict EM

Yes
Ignore I/O
Message

Comm Yes
Override

DN Yes
Fault

Yes
DN Idle

Yes
Run
Use PrFault Action &
PrFault Value

Logic
Enabled Use DNFault Action
Yes
Available & DNFault Value
Yes

Clear Value Perform LEO Use DNIdle Action &

Function DNIdle Value

Apply Force Value

Apply Value

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 209

Appendix B CIP Information

The following flow chart illustrates the behavior of Bound DOP Instances.

Figure 65 - State Transition for Bound Bulletin 290E

Protection Yes
Fault

Unrecoverable Yes Network

Network Fault
Fault Override

Return Object State Yes Yes

Conflict EM

Yes
Ignore I/O
Message

Comm Yes
Override

DN Yes
Fault

Yes
DN Idle

Y es
Run
Turn off output

Logic
Enabled Use DNFault Action
Yes
Available & DNFault Value
Yes

Clear Value Perform LEO Use DNIdle Action &

Function DNIdle Value

Apply Force Value

Apply Value

210 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 CIP Information Appendix B

Analog Input Point Object CLASS CODE 0x000A (Implemented in Bulletin 294E units only)

The following class attributes will be supported for the Analog Input Point
Object:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT 2
2 Get Max Instance UINT 1

One instance of the Analog Input Point Object will supported. CommandFreq
from Assembly 154 is placed in the value attribute when it is consumed.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Value INT 0 = Default

The following common services will be implemented for the Analog Input Point
Object:

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

Analog Output Point Object CLASS CODE 0x000B (Implemented in Bulletin 294E units only)

The following class attributes will be supported for the Analog Output Point
Object:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT 2
2 Get Max Instance UINT 1

One instance of the Analog Output Point object will supported. It will represent
the Frequency command sent to the PF40 via the DSI link. CommandFreq from
Assembly 154 is placed in the Value Attribute when it is consumed. The Value
Attribute can then be overwritten by DeviceLogix.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

3 Get/Set Value INT 0 = Default
Size of Appendix I encoded path
STRUCT: Appendix I encoded path
129 Get/Set Input Binding USINT
Array of USINT NULL path means attribute 3 drives the output.
Otherwise, this is a path to a bit in the Bit Table.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 211

Appendix B CIP Information

The following common services will be implemented for the Analog Output
Point Object:

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

Parameter Object CLASS CODE 0x000F

The following class attributes will be supported for the Parameter Object:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT —
2 Get Max Instance UINT —
8 Get Parameter Class Descriptor WORD —
100 for Bulletin 290E/291E units
9 Get Configuration Assembly Instance UINT
101 for Bulletin 294E units

The number of instances of the parameter object will depend upon the type of
Distributed Starter that the control board is connected to.

The following instance attributes will be implemented for all parameter

attributes:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get/Set Value Specified in Descriptor —
2 Get Link Path Size USINT —
Array of:
3 Get Link Path BYTE —
EPATH
4 Get Descriptor WORD —
5 Get Data Type EPATH —
6 Get Data Size USINT —
7 Get Parameter Name String SHORT_STRING —
8 Get Units String SHORT_STRING —
9 Get Help String SHORT_STRING —
10 Get Minimum Value Specified in Descriptor —
11 Get Maximum Value Specified in Descriptor —
12 Get Default Value Specified in Descriptor —
13 Get Scaling Multiplier UINT —
14 Get Scaling Divisor UINT —
15 Get Scaling Base UINT —
16 Get Scaling Offset INT —

212 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 CIP Information Appendix B

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

17 Get Multiplier Link UINT —
18 Get Divisor Link UINT —
19 Get Base Link UINT —
20 Get Offset Link UINT —
21 Get Decimal Precision USINT —

The following services will be implemented for the Parameter Object:

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x01 No Yes Get_Attribute_All
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single
0x4b No Yes Get_Enum_String

Parameter Group Object CLASS CODE 0x0010

The following class attributes will be supported for the Parameter Group Object:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT —
2 Get Max Instance UINT —

The following instance attributes will be supported for all Parameter Group
Instances.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Group Name String SHORT_STRING —
2 Get Number of Members UINT —
3 Get 1st Parameter UINT —
4 Get 2nd Parameter UINT —
n Get Nth Parameter UINT —

The following common services will be implemented for the Parameter Group
Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x01 Yes Yes Get_Attribute_All
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 213

Appendix B CIP Information

Discrete Input CLASS CODE 0x001D

Group Object
No class attributes will be supported for the Discrete Input Group (DIP) Object.

A single instance of the Discrete Input Group Object is supported and contains
the following instance attributes:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

3 Get Number of Instances USINT 6
4 Get Binding Array of UINT List of DIP Instances
6 Get/Set Off_On_Delay UINT —
7 Get/Set On_Off_Delay UINT —

The following common services will be implemented for the Discrete Input
Group Object:

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

Discrete Output CLASS CODE 0x001E

Group Object
No class attributes will be supported for the Discrete Output Group (DOP)
object.

Instance 1…3 exists for all ArmorStart LT units.

Instance 1 exists for the sole purpose of providing a place holder for the Comm
Override and Network Override parameters. Instance 1 will contain the
following attributes:

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

8 for DOL/Soft Starter (Bulletin 290E/291E)
3 Get Number of Instances USINT 12 for Inverters (Bulletin 294E)
4 Get Binding Array of UINT List of DOP Instances
6 Get/Set Command BOOL 0 = Idle, 1 = Run
0 = No override (go to safe state)
104 Get/Set Network Status Overrride BOOL 1 = Override (run local logic)
0 = No Override (go to safe state)
105 Get/Set Comm Status Overrride BOOL 1 = Override (run local logic)

Instance 2 controls the communication fault and idle behaviors for run/jog
outputs. Instance 2 contains the following instance attributes:

214 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 CIP Information Appendix B

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

3 Get 2 for DOLs (Bulletin 290E/291E)
Number of Instances USINT 4 for Drives (Bulletin 294E)
4 Get 1, 2 for DOLs (Bulletin 290E/291E)
Binding Array of UINT 1, 2, 9, 10 for Drives (Bulletin 294E)
6 Get/Set Command BOOL 0 = Idle, 1 = Run
7 Get/Set Fault Action BOOL 0 = Fault Value Attribute, 1 = Hold Last State
8 Get/Set Fault Value BOOL 0 = OFF, 1 = On
9 Get/Set Idle Action BOOL 0 = Idle Value Attribute, 1 = Hold Last State
10 Get/Set Idle Value BOOL 0 = OFF, 1 = On

Note: There are no protection fault attributes. Behavior for protection faults is
go to OFF.

Instance 3 will drive protection fault and communication fault/idle behaviors for
user outputs. Instance 3 will have the following attributes.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

3 Get Number of Instances USINT 6
4 Get Binding Array of UINT 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
6 Get/Set Command BOOL 0 = Idle, 1 = Run
7 Get/Set Fault Action BOOL 0 = Fault Value Attribute, 1 = Hold Last State
8 Get/Set Fault Value BOOL 0 = OFF, 1 = On
9 Get/Set Idle Action BOOL 0 = Idle Value Attribute, 1 = Hold Last State
10 Get/Set Idle Value BOOL 0 = OFF, 1 = On
113 Get/Set Pr Fault Action BOOL 0 = Pr Fault Value Attribute, 1 = Ignore
114 Get/Set Pr Fault Value BOOL 0 = OFF, 1 = On

The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Input Group
Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

Control Supervisor Object CLASS CODE 0x0029

No class attributes are supported.

A single instance (Instance 1) of the Control Supervisor Object is supported and

contains the following instance attributes.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 215

Appendix B CIP Information

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

3 Get/Set Run 1 BOOL
These Run outputs also map to DOP Instances 1 and 2
4➊ Get/Set Run 2 BOOL
7 Get Running 1 BOOL —
8➊ Get Running 2 BOOL —
9 Get Ready BOOL —
10 Get Tripped BOOL —
12 Get/Set Fault Reset BOOL 0 > 1 = Trip Reset

➊ Reversing Starters (291E) and Inverter (294E) Starters only

The following common services will be implemented for the Control Supervisor
Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

Overload Object CLASS CODE 0x002C

No class attributes will be supported for the Overload Object.

A single instance (Instance 1) of the Overload Object is supported for DOL

(Bulletin 290E/291E) and Reversing (Bulletin 294E) Starters. Instance 1
contains the following instance attributes.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

3 Get/Set FLA Setting BOOL xxx.x amps
4 Get/Set Trip Class USINT —
5 Get Average Current INT xxx.x amps
7 Get % Thermal Utilized USINT xxx% FLA
8 Get Current L1 INT
9 Get Current L2 INT xxx.x Amps
10 Get Current L3 INT
190 Get/Set FLA Setting Times 10 BOOL
192 Get Average Current Times 10 UINT
193 Get Current L1 Times 10 UINT xxx.xx Amps
194 Get Current L2 Times 10 UINT
195 Get Current L3 Times 10 UINT

216 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 CIP Information Appendix B

The following common services are implemented for the Overload Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x01 No Yes Get_Attribute_All
0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

Device Level Ring (DLR) CLASS CODE 0x0047

Object
The following class attribute will be supported for the DLR Object.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT 2

A single instance (instance 1) will be supported.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Network Topology USINT 0 = Linear
1 = Ring
0 = Normal
1 = Ring Fault
2 Get Network Status USINT 2 = Unexpected Loop Detect
3 = Partial Network Fault
4 = Rapid Fault/Restore Cycle
Struct of:
UDINT
10 Get Active Supervisor Address Ring Supervisor
Array of 6
USINT
12 Get Capability Flags DWORD 0x00000002

The following common services will be implemented for the DLR Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x01 No Yes Get_Attribute_All
0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single

Extended Device Object CLASS CODE 0x0064

The following class attributes will be supported for the Extended Device Object.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT 2

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 217

Appendix B CIP Information

A single instance (instance 1) will be supported.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Set Name STRING User Assigned Name – Defaults to a null. 32 chars max
2 Set Description STRING User Assigned Description – Defaults to a null. 64 chars max
User Assigned Geographic Loc. – Defaults to null. 32 chars
3 Set Geographic Location STRING max
101 Set Contacxts 1 STRING Contacts String – Defaults to a null. – 80 chars max.
102 Set Contacts 2 STRING Contacts String – Defaults to a null. – 80 chars max.

The following common services will be implemented for the Extended Device
Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x01 No Yes Get_Attribute_All
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

DPI Fault Object CLASS CODE 0x0097

This object provides access to fault information within the device.

The following class attributes will be supported for the DPI Fault Object.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Class Revision UINT 1
2 Get Number of Instances UINT 4
3 Get/Set Fault Cmd Write USINT 0=NOP; 1=Clear Fault; 2=Clear Flt Queue
The instance of the Fault Queue Entry containing information
4 Get Fault Instance Read UINT about the fault that tripped the device.
Struct of: Array of SnapShot parameter instance numbers
5 Get Fault into parameter instance array UINT Array Size = 5
Array [5] of UINT Array of Instance Numbers = 23,24,25,26,27
6 Get Number of Recorded Faults UINT The number of faults recorded in the fault queue.

218 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 CIP Information Appendix B

Four instances of the DPI Fault Object will be supported.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

0 Get Full/All Info Struct of:
Fault Code UINT See Tables below
Fault Source Struct of:
DPI Port Number USINT 0
Device Object Instance USINT
Fault Text BYTE [16] See Tables below
Fault Time Stamp Struct of:
Timer Value ULDINT
Timer Descriptor WORD
Help Object Instance USINT
Fault Data Array [5] of 32 bit fault data Snapshot data
values
1 Get Basic Info Struct of:
Fault Code UINT See Tables below
Fault Source Struct of:
DPI Port Number USINT 0
Device Object Instance USINT
Fault Time Stamp Struct of:
Timer Value ULINT
Timer Descriptor WORD
3 Get Help Text STRING See Tables below

The following common services will be implemented for the DPI Fault Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 Yes No Set_Attribute_Single

The table below lists Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for DOL
and Reversers.
Table 33 - Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for DOL and Reversers
Fault
Code Fault Text Help Text
1 Fault 1 —
2 User Defined User defined trip has occurred.
3 Overload Trip Load has drawn excessive current based on trip class selected.
4 Fault 4 —
5 Phase Loss Trip Indicates missing supply phase. This fault can be disabled.
6 Jam Trip Motor current above jam level for more than jam trip delay time.
7 Underload Trip Motor current below UL level for more than UL trip delay time.
8 Fault 8 —
9 Fault 9 —
10 Fault 10 —
11 Fault 11 —
12 Stall Trip Motor current above stall trip level during motor starting.
13 Switched Power Indicates the loss of switched control power.
Not available in units with Integrated Power Supply.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 219

Appendix B CIP Information

Table 33 - Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for DOL and Reversers
Fault
Code Fault Text Help Text
14 Under Power Trip Indicates the internal power supply is below its working level.
Available in units with Integrated Power Supply only
15 Sensor Short Flags a miswired hardware input point.
16 Output Short Flags a miswired hardware output point.
17 Fault 17 —
18 Fault 18 —
19 Phase Imbalance Indicates an imbalanced phase current.
20 Fault 20 —
21 Aux Power Loss Auxiliary Power was lost or dipped below the minimum threshold.
Not available in units with Integrated Power Supply
22 Fault 22 —
23 Fault 23 —
24 Fault 24 —
25 Fault 25 —
26 Fault 26 —
27 NonVol Memory This is a major fault which renders the unit inoperable.
28 Fault 28 —
29 Fault 29 —
30 Hardware Fault This is a major fault which renders the unit inoperable.
31 Fault 31 —
32 Fault 32 —
33 Fault 33 —
34 Fault 34 —
35 Fault 35 —
36 Fault 36 —
37 Fault 37 —
38 Fault 38 —
39 Fault 39 —
40 Unknown Fault —

The table below lists Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for Drive
units.
Table 34 - Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for Drive Units
PF4M
Fault Fault
Code Fault Text Help Text Code
1 Fault 1 —
2 User Defined User defined trip has occurred.
3 Motor Overload The load has drawn excessive current. 7
4 Drive Overload 150% load for 1 min. or 200% load for 3 sec. exceeded. 64

220 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 CIP Information Appendix B

Table 34 - Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for Drive Units
PF4M
Fault Fault
Code Fault Text Help Text Code
5 Phase U to Gnd A Phase U to Ground fault detected between drive and motor. 38
6 Phase V to Gnd A Phase V to Ground fault detected between drive and motor. 39
7 Phase W to Gnd A Phase W to Ground fault detected between drive and motor. 40
8 Phase UV Short Excessive current detected between phases U and V. 41
9 Phase UW Short Excessive current detected between phases U and W. 42
10 Phase VW Short Excessive current detected between phases V and W. 43
11 Ground Fault A current path to earth ground at one or more output terminals. 13
12 Stall Trip The drive is unable to accelerate the motor. 6
13 Switched Power Indicates the loss of switched control power.
Not available in units with Integrated Power Supply
14 Under Power Trip Indicates the internal power supply is below its working level.
Available in units with Integrated Power Supply only.
15 Sensor Short Flags a miswired hardware input point.
16 Output Short Flags a miswired hardware output point.
17 Fault 17
18 Heatsink Temp The Heatsink temperature exceeds a predefined value. 8
19 HW Over Current The drive output current has exceeded the hardware limit. 12
20 SW OverCurrent Programmed parameter 83 (SW Current Trip) has been exceeded. 63
21 Aux Power Loss Auxiliary Power was lost or dipped below the minimum threshold.
Not available in units with Integrated Power Supply.
22 Internal Comm Communication with the internal Power Flex drive has been lost. 71
23 Drive Comm Loss The RS485 port on the internal Power Flex stopped communicating. 81
24 Power Loss Drive DC Bus Voltage remained below 85% of nominal bus voltage. 3
25 Under Voltage DC Bus Voltage fell below the minimum value. 4
26 Over Voltage DC Bus Voltage exceeded the maximum value. 5
27 MCB EEPROM This is a major fault which renders the ArmorStart inoperable.
28 Param Sync The drive and Main Control Board EEPROMS are not in sync.
29 Drive EEPROM The drive EEPROM checksum checks have failed. 100
30 Hardware Fault This is a major fault which renders the unit inoperable
31 Fan RMP The internal cooling fan is not running properly.
32 Power Unit A major failure has been detected in the drive power section. 70
33 Drive I/O Brd A failure has been detected in the drive control and I/O section. 122
34 Restart Retries Automatic fault reset and run retries exceeded. 33
35 Drive Aux In Flt The drive auxiliary input interlock is open inside the ArmorStart. 2
36 Fault 36 —
37 Drv Param Reset Internal Drive Parameters (Parameters > 100) have been defaulted. 48
38 Fault 38 —
39 Fault 39 —
40 Unknown Fault —

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 221

Appendix B CIP Information

DPI Alarm Object CLASS CODE 0x0098

This object provides access to warning information within the device.

The following class attributes will be supported.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Class Revision UINT 1
2 Get Number of Instances UINT 1
3 Set Alarm Cmd Write USINT 0=NOP; 1=Clear Alarm; 2=Clear Queue
The instance of the Fault Queue Entry containing information
74 Get Alarm Instance Read UINT about the fault that tripped the device.
6 Get Number of Recorded Alarms UINT The number of faults recorded in the fault queue.

A single instance of the DPI Alarm Object will be supported.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

0 Get Full/All Info Struct of:
Alarm Code UINT See Tables below
Alarm Source Struct of:
DPI Port Number USINT 0
Device Object Instance USINT
Alarm Text STRING See Tables below
Alarm Time Stamp Struct of:
Timer Value ULINT
Timer Descriptor WORD
Help Object Interface USINT
Alarm Data
1 Get Basic Info Struct of:
Alarm Code UINT See Tables below
Alarm Source Struct of:
DPI Port Number USINT 0
Device Object Instance USINT
Alarm Time Stamp Struct of:
Timer Value ULINT
Timer Descriptor WORD
3 Get Help Text STRING See Tables below

The following common services will be implemented for the DPI Fault Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 Yes No Set_Attribute_Single

The table below lists Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings.

Table 35 - Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for ArmorStart LT
Warning
Code Warning Text Help Text
1 Warning 1 —
2 Warning 2 —
3 Motor Overload Overload warning level has been exceeded.

222 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 CIP Information Appendix B

Table 35 - Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for ArmorStart LT
Warning
Code Warning Text Help Text
4 Warning 4 —
5 Warning 5 Indicates missing supply phase. This fault can be disabled.
6 Jam Warning Motor current has exceeded jam warning level.
7 Underload Warning Motor current dropped below Underload Warning level.
8 Warning 8 —
9 Warning 9 —
10 Warning 10 —
11 Warning 11 —
12 Warning 12 —
13 Switched Pwr Warn Indicates the control power has dipped below 19 Volts.
Not available in units with Integrated Power Supply.
14 Under Power Warn Indicates the internal power supply is below its optimal level.
Available in units with Integrated Power Supply only.
15 Warning 15 —
16 Warning 16 —
17 Warning 17 —
18 Warning 18 —
19 Warning 19 —
20 Warning 20 —
21 Aux Power Warn Indicates auxiliary Power was has dipped below 19 Volts.
Not available in units with Integrated Power Supply.

TCP/IP Interface Object CLASS CODE 0x00F5

The following class attributes will be supported.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT 2

One Instance of the TCP/IP Interface Object will be supported.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Status DWORD
2 Get Configuration Capability DWORD 0x000000F4
3 Get/Set Configuration Control DWORD 0 = Configuration from NVS
2 = Configuration from DHCP
4 Get Physical Link Object Struct of:
UINT 2 words
Padded EPATH 20 F6 24 01 (Enet Link Object Instance 1)

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 223

Appendix B CIP Information

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

5 Get/Set Interface Configuration Struct of:
UDINT IP Address
UDINT Network Mask
UDINT Gateway Address
UDINT Primary DNS
UDINT Secondary DNS
STRING Default Domain Name for not fully qualified host names
6 Get/Set Host Name STRING
8 Get/Set TTL Value USINT Time to Live value for EtherNet/IP multicast packets
9 Get/Set Multicast Config Structure of
USINT Allocation Control
USINT Reserved
UINT Number of multicast addresses to allocate (1-4)
UDINT Multicast starting address.
10 Get/Set SelectAcd BOOL Activates the use of ACD
11 LastConflictDetected Structure of
USINT AcdActivity
USINT(6) RemoteMAC
USINT(28) ArpPdu

The following common services will be implemented for the TCP/IP Interface
Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single
0x4C No Yes Get_And_Clear

Ethernet Link Object CLASS CODE 0x00F6

The following class attributes will be supported.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Revision UINT 3
2 Get Max Instance UINT 2
3 Get Number of Instances UINT 2

Two instances of the Ethernet Link Object will be supported.

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

1 Get Interface Speed UDINT 10 or 100 Mbit/Sec
2 Get Interface Flags DWORD See ENet/IP Specification
3 Get Physical Address ARRAY of 6 USINTs MAC Address

224 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 CIP Information Appendix B

Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value

4 Get Interface Counters Struct of:
In Octets
In Ucast packets
In NUcast packets
In Discards
In Errors
In Unknown Protos
Out Octets
Out Ucast packets
Out NUcast packets
Out Discards
Out Errors
5 Get Media Counters Struct of:
Alignment Errors
FCS Errors
Single Collisions
SQE Test Errors
Deferred Transmits
Late Collisions
Excessive Collisions
MAC Transmit Errors
Carrier Sense Errors
Frame Too Long
MAC Receive Errors
6 Get/Set Interface Control Struct of:
Control Bits
Forced Interface
Speed
7 Get Interface Type USINT
8 Get Inteface State USINT
9 Get/Set Admin State USINT
10 Get Interface Label SHORT_STRING Instance 1:LS 1
Instance 2:LS 2

The following common services will be implemented for the Ethernet Link
Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 225

Appendix B CIP Information

Trip and Warning CLASS CODE 0x0376

Email Object
No class attributes will be supported.

Attribute Need in Access NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values
ID Implementation Rule
2 Required Set NV To Struct of Email address of the recipient The default value of this
of Trip and Warning Emails string is the null string.
To Length UDINT Length of string in bytes
To Data Array of ASCII characters Example:
USINT [email protected]
3 Required Set NV From Struct of Email address of this device The default value of this
string is the null string.
From Length UDINT Length of string in bytes
From Data Array of ASCII characters Example:
USINT [email protected]
5 Required Set NV SMTP Server Address Struct of SMTP Server Address String The default value of this
string is the null string.
Addr Length UDINT Length of string in bytes
Addr Data Array of ASCII characters
USINT
6 Required Set NV SMTP User Name Struct of SMTP User Name String The default value of this
string is the null string.
To Length UDINT Length of string in bytes
To Data Array of ASCII characters
USINT
7 Required Set NV SMTP Password Struct of SMTP Password String The default value of this
string is the null string.
To Length UDINT Length of string in bytes
To Data Array of ASCII characters
USINT
8 Required Set NV SMTP Port UINT The SMTP Port The Default Value is 0.
9 Optional Set NV Trip Email Mask WORD Mask to enable emails for
individual trip conditions
10 Optional Set NV Warning Email Mask WORD Mask to enable emails for
individual warning conditions
11 Optional Set NV Trip Reset Email Mask WORD Mask to enable emails when
trip conditions are cleared
12 Optional Set NV Warning Reset Email Mask WORD Mask to enable emails when warning
conditions are cleared
13 Optional Get V Trip Email Count UINT Number of emails sent in Defaults to the value 0
response to a trip condition
14 Optional Get V Trip Cleared Emails UINT Number of emails sent in Defaults to the value 0
response to clearing a trip
15 Optional Get V Warning Email Count UINT Number of emails sent in Defaults to the value 0
response to a warningcondition
16 Optional Get V Warning Cleared Emails UINT Number of emails sent in Defaults to the value 0
response toclearing a trip
17 Optional Get V Email Send Features UINT Number of email failures detected Defaults to the value 0
18 Optional Get V Trip Email Count UINT Number of emails sent in
response to a trip condition

226 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 CIP Information Appendix B

The following common services will be implemented for the TCP/IP Interface
Object.

Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance Service Name
0x01 No Yes Get_Attribute_All
0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 227

Appendix B CIP Information

Notes:

228 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Appendix C

Using DeviceLogix™

Introduction DeviceLogix is a stand-alone Boolean program that resides within the

ArmorStart LT. The program is embedded in the product so that there is no
additional module required to use this technology; DeviceLogix is programmed
using the Add-On Profile for RS Logix 5000.

In addition to the actual programming, DeviceLogix can be configured to

operate under specific situations. It is important to note that the DeviceLogix
program will only run if the logic has been enabled and unswitched power is
present. This can be done within the “Logic Editor.” The operation configuration
is accomplished by setting the “Network Override” and “Communication
Override” parameter. The following information describes the varying levels of
operation:
• If both overrides are disabled and the logic is enabled, the ONLY time
DeviceLogix will run is if there is an active I/O connection with a master,
i.e. the master is in Run mode. At all other times DeviceLogix will be
running the logic, but will NOT control the state of the outputs.
• If the Network Override is enabled and the logic is enabled then
DeviceLogix controls the state of the outputs when the PLC is in Run
mode and if a network fault occurs.
• If the Communications Override is enabled and the logic is enabled, the
device does not need any I/O connection to run the logic. As long as there
are switched and unswitched power sources connected to the device, the
logic will control the state of the outputs.

DeviceLogix Local Control Mode

In local control mode, the embedded DeviceLogix logic engine drives the local
outputs and motor run/jog commands from a local DeviceLogix program. Local
Control is completely independent of the any or all CIP connections. I/O and/or
Explicit Message connections can exist in any state and they do not affect the user
outputs or the run/jog commands for the motor. Local control mode is chosen by
when the keypad “Auto LED” is on, “Network Override” is set “Communication
Override” is set, and DeviceLogix is enabled.

I/O Networked Control Mode

In I/O networked control mode, local outputs and motor run/jog commands are
received over a CIP I/O connection in the established state. I/O networked
control mode is chosen when DeviceLogix is disabled, or when DeviceLogix is
enabled and no user outputs or run commands are being driven in the
DeviceLogix program.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 229

Appendix C Using DeviceLogix™

DeviceLogix Programming DeviceLogix has many applications and the implementation is typically only
limited to the imagination of the programmer. Keep in mind that the application
of DeviceLogix is only designed to handle simple logic routines.

DeviceLogix is programmed using simple Boolean math operators, such as AND,

OR, NOT, timers, counters, latches, and analog values. Decision making is done
by combining these Boolean operations with any of the available I/O. The inputs
and outputs used to interface with the logic can come from the network or from
the device hardware. Hardware I/O is the physical Inputs and Outputs located on
the device such as push buttons and pilot lights that are connected to the
ArmotStart LT. Refer to Table 36 - for complete list of DeviceLogix I/O
functions.

There are many reasons to use the DeviceLogix functionality, but some of the
most common are listed below:
• Increased system reliability
• Fast update times (1 - 2 ms possible)
• Improved diagnostics and reduced troubleshooting
• Operation independent of PLC or Network status
• Continue to run process in the event of network interruptions
• Critical operations can be safely shutdown through local logic

DeviceLogix Programming Example

The following example will show how to program a simple logic routine to
interface the ArmorStart with a remote hard-wired startstop station. In this case
the I/O is wired as shown in the table below.

Input/Output Table
Bit Description
Pt00 Start Button
Pt01 Stop Button
Out02 Run Forward

IMPORTANT Before programming logic, it is important to decide on the conditions under

which the logic will run. The conditions can be defined by setting
CommsOverride and NetworkOverride to the value that you want.

1. Refer to section “How to Add a New Module, Using the Add-On Profile”
to configure the I/O. Then select the DeviceLogix section and create a
program.

230 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Using DeviceLogix™ Appendix C

2. Click on the “DeviceLogix” tab. If you are on-line with a device, a dialog
box will appear asking you to upload or download. Click on “Upload.”

3. Click the “Start Logic Editor” button.

4. If programming off-line continue to step 5, otherwise click on the “Edit”

button. Click “Yes” when asked if you want to Enter Edit Mode. Once in
edit mode the entire list of Function Blocks will be displayed in the
toolbar.

5. Left Click on the “RSL” function block. This is a reset dominate latch.

6. Move the cursor into the grid, and left click to drop the function onto the
grid.

7. From the toolbar, Click on the “Discrete Input” button and select Pt00
from the pull-down menu. This is the remote start button based on the
example I/O table.

8. Place the input to the left of the RSL function. To drop the input on the
page, left click on the desired position.

9. Place the mouse cursor over the tip of Pt00. The tip will turn green. Click
on the tip when it turns green.

10. Move the mouse cursor toward the input of the RSL function. A line will
follow the cursor. When a connection can be made, the tip of the RSL
function will also turn green. Click the on Input and the line will be drawn
from Pt00 to the Set Input of the RSL function.

Note: If this was not a valid connection, one of the pin tips would have turned
red rather than green. Left double clicking on the unused portion of the grid or
pressing the “Esc” key at any time will cancel the connection process.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 231

Appendix C Using DeviceLogix™

11. From the toolbar, Click on the “Discrete Input” button and select Pt01
from the pull-down menu. This is the remote stop button based on the
example I/O table.

12. Place the input to the left of the RSL function.

13. Connect the input to the reset input of the RSL latch.

14. From the toolbar, Click on the “Discrete Output” button and select
“RunForward” from the pull-down menu. RunForward is the relay
controlling the coil of the contactor. Click OK.

15. Move the cursor into the grid and place the Output to the right of the RSL
function block.

16. Connect the output of the “RSL” function block to Run Fwd.

17. Click on the “Verify” button located in the toolbar or select “Logic Verify”
from the “Tools” pull-down menu.

18. Click on the “Edit” button to toggle out of edit mode if online with a
device.

232 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Using DeviceLogix™ Appendix C

19. Go to the pull-down menu in the right corner of the toolbar and select
“Download”.

Note: Ensure that the PLC key switch is in the Program position. If in any other
position, the download will not occur and an error will be generated.

20. Press “OK” when told the download was successful.

21. Now from the same pull-down menu select “Logic Enable On.”

22. The ArmorStart is now programmed and the logic is Active.

Table 36 - DeviceLogix Input and Output Variables

Element Type Bulletin 290E Bulletin 291E Bulletin 294E

Consumed Network Data PT00DeviceIn PT00DeviceIn PT00DeviceIn
… … …
PT15DeviceIn PT15DeviceIn PT15DeviceIn
Discrete Input Points PT00 PT00 PT00
… … …
PT00 PT00 PT00
Discrete Output Points RunForward RunForward RunForward
… RunReverse RunReverse
Out00 Out00 Out00
… … …
Out05 Out05 Out05
JogForward
JogReverse
Produced Network Data Pt00DeviceOut Pt00DeviceOut Pt00DeviceOut
… … …
Pt15DeviceOut Pt15DeviceOut Pt15DeviceOut
ResetFault ResetFault ResetFault
MotionDisable MotionDisable MotionDisable
ForceSnapshot ForceSnapshot ForceSnapshot
UserDefinedFault UserDefinedFault UserDefinedFault
KeypadDisable KeypadDisable KeypadDisable
Accel2
Decel2
BrakeRelease

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 233

Appendix C Using DeviceLogix™

Element Type Bulletin 290E Bulletin 291E Bulletin 294E

Faults OverloadTrip OverloadTrip OverloadTrip
PhaseShortTrip PhaseShortTrip PhaseShortTrip
UnderPowerTrip UnderPowerTrip UnderPowerTrip
SensorShortTrip SensorShortTrip SensorShortTrip
PhaseImbalTrip PhaseImbalTrip PhaseImbalTrip
NonVolMemooryTrip NonVolMemooryTrip NonVolMemooryTrip
ParamSyncTrip
JamTrip JamTrip DCBusFaults
StallTrip StallTrip StallTrip
UnderloadTrip UnderloadTrip UnderloadTrip
GroundFault
RestartRetries
DriveHdwFault
OutputShortTrip OutputShortTrip OutputShortTrip
UserDefinedTrip UserDefinedTrip UserDefinedTrip
HardwareFltTrip HardwareFltTrip HardwareFltTrip
Warnings OverloadWarning OverloadWarning OverloadWarning
UnderPowerWarn UnderPowerWarn UnderPowerWarn
PhaseImbalWarn PhaseImbalWarn
JamWarning JamWarning
UnderLoadWarn UnderLoadWarn
UnswitchedPwrWarn UnswitchedPwrWarn UnswitchedPwrWarn

234 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Using DeviceLogix™ Appendix C

Element Type Bulletin 290E Bulletin 291E Bulletin 294E

Misc Data TripPresent TripPresent TripPresent
WarningPresent WarningPresent WarningPresent
RunningForward RunningForward RunningForward
RunningReverse RunningReverse RunningReverse
Ready Ready Ready
NetControlStatus NetControlStatus NetControlStatus
NetRefStatus
CurrentFlowing CurrentFlowing AtReference
KeyPadAuto KeyPadAuto KeyPadAuto
KeyPadOff KeyPadOff KeyPadOff
KeyPadHand KeyPadHand KeyPadHand
KeyPadJogging
DisconnectStatus DisconnectStatus DisconnectStatus
BrakeStatus
ExplicitCnxn ExplicitCnxn ExplicitCnxn
IOConnection IOConnection IOConnection
ExplicitCnxnFault ExplicitCnxnFault ExplicitCnxnFault
IOCnxnFault IOCnxnFault IOCnxnFault
IOCnxnIdle IOCnxnIdle IOCnxnIdle
DLREnabled DLREnabled DLREnabled
DLRFault DLRFault DLRFault
Analog Input Point NetInputFreq
Analog Output Point CommandFreq
Misc Analog Input Data PhaseL1Current PhaseL1Current OutputFreq
PhaseL2Current PhaseL2Current OutputCurrent
PhaseL3Current PhaseL3Current OutputVoltage
AverageCurrent AverageCurrent DCBusVoltage
%ThermalUtilized %ThermalUtilized DriveTemperature
SwitchedVolts SwitchedVolts SwitchedVolts
OutputSourceV ➊ OutputSourceV ➊ OutputSourceV ➊
UnswitchedVolts UnswitchedVolts UnswitchedVolts
SensorSourceV ➊ SensorSourceV ➊ SensorSourceV ➊
Analog Consumed Network Data AnalogDeviceIn AnalogDeviceIn AnalogDeviceIn
Analog Produced Network Data AnalogDeviceOut AnalogDeviceOut AnalogDeviceOut

➊ IPS Units

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 235

Appendix C Using DeviceLogix™

ArmorStart LT Bulletin 294E Example Configuration

Hardware & Software Versions Used in this example

• RSLogix 5000 Revision 19

• Download AOP from the Support website:
• http://support.rockwellautomation.com/controlflash/LogixProfiler.asp
• Hardware:
– 294E-FD2P5Z-G1 — ArmorStart LT
– 1606-XLP72E — Power Supply
– 1783-EMS08TA — Stratix Ethernet switch
– 1756-L63 system set — Control Logix
– 1756-EN2TR — EtherNet/IP module for Control Logix
• The IP address of the Hardware will be preset to as followed:

Item Description IP Address

1 ArmorStart LT 192.168.1.36
2 1756-EN2TR 192.168.1.32
3 PC 192.168.1.89

• The Armorstart LT control power wiring example used

Figure 1: Control Power Wiring Example

ArmorStart LT
L1 L2 L3
Switched Control Power
Off
Unswitched Control Power
*

Disconnect

EtherNet Inputs Outputs Motor

Comms Control
Motor
Controller
A1 A2 A3
T1 T2 T3

* Control power output is determined by disconnect status

L +
24VDC Single External Power Supply
N -
Class 2
External
24VDC Power
Supply

236 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Using DeviceLogix™ Appendix C

Download the AOP Download and install the AOP for RSLOGIX5000 from the Service and
Support website.

1. Open an Internet Explorer and enter the following URL:

http://support.rockwellautomation.com/controlflash/LogixProfiler.asp

2. From the list of the Add-On I/O Modules Profiles, scroll down and select
Bulletin 290E, 291E, 294E ArmorStart LT from the list and download the
file.

3. To download the file, your RSLOGIX 5000 Serial Number will be

prompted. Enter the Serial Number and click on the ‘Qualify For Update’
button to proceed.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 237

Appendix C Using DeviceLogix™

4. Upon verification, the following screen will appear. Click on the link to
download the file.

5. At the pop-up dialogue box, select ‘Save’ to save the file.

6. Select the folder to save the file and click ‘Save’. The downloading will
start.

238 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Using DeviceLogix™ Appendix C

7. Upon the completion of downloading, unzip the files to the folder.

8. Run the MPSetup.exe from the folder and start installation.

9. The following dialog box will appear.

10. The RSLogix 5000 Module Profiles Setup window will be shown. Click
‘Next’ to continue.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 239

Appendix C Using DeviceLogix™

11. Select ‘I accept the terms in the license agreement’ and click on ‘Next’

12. Then click on ‘Next’ to proceed to installation

240 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Using DeviceLogix™ Appendix C

13. Select ‘Install’ to start installation

14. The profiles will be installed, upon completion, click on ‘Next’ to proceed

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 241

Appendix C Using DeviceLogix™

15. To complete, click on ‘Finish’

Use of the AOP 1. Start the RSLogix5000 from Start ➔ Rockwell Software ➔ RSLogix 5000
Enterprise Series ➔ RSLogix 5000
in RSLogix 5000

2. Start a new project, by clicking on the icon

242 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Using DeviceLogix™ Appendix C

3. In the controller dialog box, enter the appropriate information of the

controller. Then click ‘OK’ to proceed

4. In the Controller Organizer window find “I/O Configuration” and right

click on the 1756 Backplane and select New module

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 243

Appendix C Using DeviceLogix™

5. Select Module Dialog box followed by “Communications” and then select

1756-EN2TR and click OK

6. In the New module dialog box enter the Unit name, IP address, and slot
then click OK

244 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Using DeviceLogix™ Appendix C

7. Right click on the EN2TR-32, in the Controller Organizer at the I/O

Configuration ➔ 1756-Backplane ➔ 1756-EN2TR, select ‘New
Module…’

8. In the Select Module window select “Other” and choose the

294E-FD2P5Z and click on OK

Note: Please select the appropriate module. If the wrong module is selected once
RSLOGIX 5000 is in Online with the controller a yellow triangle will appear
next to the module indicating an I/O error has occurred.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 245

Appendix C Using DeviceLogix™

9. In the New Module window, enter the Name of the Armorstart LT and the
IP address assigned to it. You can now start to configure the ArmorStart
LT. Begin with “Motor Protection & Control”

10. At the Motor Protection & Control, enter the motor information.

Note: Please refer to the motor nameplate for the information.

246 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Using DeviceLogix™ Appendix C

11. Next select “Speed Control”. By default “Speed Reference” is set to select
Logix. The speed of the motor will be control by the controller tag in the
Contrologix. Configure the Acceleration/Deceleration and Jog Frequency
here.

12. Then proceed to the “Fault Configuration” and configure the reset mode
to Automatic or Manual. Then click OK to proceed.

13. Download the configuration to the controller. To download, select

Communication ➔ Who Active.

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 247

Appendix C Using DeviceLogix™

14. At the Who Active window select the 1756-EN2TR, then the controller,
and click on the Download button

15. The Download dialog box will appear, click on Download to proceed

16. The configuration will be downloaded and the Downloading dialog box
will show the progress

17. Upon completion, select Run Mode as per shown

248 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

 Using DeviceLogix™ Appendix C

18. Double click on the Armorstart_LT at the Controller Organizer

19. Proceed to the Status to check the status of the ArmorStart LT

20. Double click on the Controller Tags at the Controller Organizer

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012 249

Appendix C Using DeviceLogix™

21. Expand the output tag of the ArmorStart LT, i.e.: Armorstart_LT_36:O

22. Enter the following value:

Name Value Description

Armorstart_LT_36:O.FreqCommand 300 30.0Hz, Setting Target Frequency
Armorstart_LT_36_O.RunForward 1 Start the RUNning in Forward Direction

23. Toggle the Armorstart_LT_36_O.RunForward to move the motor in the

forward direction. Then toggle Armorstart_LT_36_O.RunReverse. The
motor will run in the reverse direction.

24. Change the value of the FreqCommand to vary the speed.

Note: Setting the tag value to 500 instructs the drive to run at 50.0Hz

This example configuration is now complete. If additional help is needed, please

contact your Rockwell Automation sales representative or technical support.

250 Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products.
At http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/, you can find technical manuals, a knowledge base of FAQs, technical and
application notes, sample code and links to software service packs, and a MySupport feature that you can customize to
make the best use of these tools.

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation, configuration, and troubleshooting, we offer
TechConnectSM support programs. For more information, contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation
representative, or visit http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/.

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation, review the information that is contained in this
manual. You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running.
United States or Canada 1.440.646.3434
Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/americas/phone_en.html, or contact your local Rockwell
Automation representative.

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the
manufacturing facility. However, if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned, follow these procedures.
United States Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your
distributor to complete the return process.
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure.

Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this
document, complete this form, publication RA-DU002, available at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/.

Trademark List
Allen-Bradley, ArmorConnect, ArmorStart LT, ControlLogix, CompactLogix, PowerFlex, RSLinx, StepLogic, DeviceLogix, On-Machine, RSNetWorx, and RSLogix 5000, are trademarks of
Rockwell Automation, Inc. Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş., Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400

www.rockwel lautomation.com

Power, Control and Information Solutions Headquarters

Americas: Rockwell Automation, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204-2496 USA, Tel: (1) 414.382.2000, Fax: (1) 414.382.4444
Europe/Middle East/Africa: Rockwell Automation NV, Pegasus Park, De Kleetlaan 12a, 1831 Diegem, Belgium, Tel: (32) 2 663 0600, Fax: (32) 2 663 0640
Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, Level 14, Core F, Cyberport 3, 100 Cyberport Road, Hong Kong, Tel: (852) 2887 4788, Fax: (852) 2508 1846

Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012

Supersedes Publication 290E-UM001A-EN-P - December 2011 Copyright © 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.